Aution max ax 4030 ошибки

Related Manuals for Arkray AUTION MAX AX-4030

AUTION MAXTM

AX-4030Service manual

ARKRAY, Inc.

IntroductionAUTION MAX AX-4030 was manufactured under strict
quality control conditions. It is a highly-accurate instrument so
if the quality of just one of its many parts deteriorates, you will
not be able to obtain reliable results. It is a high-precision
instrument so usage problems will also have a large impact on
measurement results. In the event that instrument failure occurs
due to this, please refer to the user manual in conjunction with
this service manual and take appropriate action.

Caution!!This service manual has been prepared for specially
trained service engineers. If you are not such a person, please
refrain from using this manual. In the event that an unqualified
person performs servicing, ARKRAY, Inc. will accept no liability
and warranties for all instruments will be invalidated.

ContentIntroduction Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer2 4 6 11 1.
FEATURES 2.SPECIFICATIONS 3.MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE 4.APPEARANCE
SKETCH

Chapter 2

System Configuration2 5 55 56 58

1.ASSEMBLY FLOWCHART 2.DEVELOPMENT DRAWING 3.DIAGRAM 4.TUBING
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 5.OPERATION SEQUENCE CHART

Chapter 3

Operation of Service mode2 2 8

1.OVERVIEW 2.ENTERING AND EXITING THE SERVICE MODE 3.CONFIGURING
THE INSTRUMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS

Chapter 4 Chapter 5

Circuit diagram Standard inspection1 1 1 3

1.Circuit diagram

1.PURPOSE 2.SCOPE OF APPLICATION 3.TEST ITEMS 4.INSPECTION
CONTENT AND PASSING CRITERIA

Chapter 6

Adjustments2 3 52 53 62

1.ADJUSTMENT ITEMS, TOOLS AND SUPPLIES (MAIN BODY) 2.ADJUSTMENTS
(MAIN BODY) 3.SAMPLER ADJUSTMENT ITEMS, JIGS AND SUPPLIES (SAMPLER)
4.SAMPLER ADJUSTMENTS 5.BARCODE READER ADJUSTMENTS

Appendix

AX-4030 Service Manual

Chapter 11.1. 2. 3. 4.

Outline of the Analyzer

Outline of AX — 4030Features
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
2 Specifications
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
4 Measurement
Principle……………………………………………………………………………………………
6 Appearance sketch
……………………………………………………………………………………………….
11

1-1

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

AX-4030 Service Manual

1. Features Easy to operate Daily measurements are done in three
easy steps: [1] load the test strips, [2] load the samples and
start key. After pressing the start key, the instrument
automatically performs the entire effectuate measurement: test
strip picking, sample transport, sample measurement, and test strip
disposal. Test strip staining used After aspirating sample with a
nozzle, the instrument stains each reagent pad on the test strip
with a quantity of sample. Measurements can be performed as long as
there is at least 2 mL of tube. Dual test strip feeders for
multiple test strips The instrument has two feeders, therefore two
types of often used test strips can be loaded in the all times.
When using the supplied item racks, test strips can be
automatically picked to the item racks so as to expedite
measurement. This reduces the hassles makes measurement work more
efficient. Large color LCD A large color LCD makes measurement
conditions and menu settings easy to read and identify, facilitates
operation. If a warning occurs such as test strips or solution
running out, remedial displayed in English so that the situation
can be quickly corrected. Thermal compensation The best temperature
range for measurements is 20 — 25C, but some measurement items may
not results if visually evaluated outside of this range. Therefore,
the thermal compensation yield correct which instrument at small
[3] press the

series of operations to

aspiration, test strip staining,

sample in the sample

from the feeder assigned

of changing test strips in/out and

action is

feature of this

instrument minimizes errors caused by temperature changes within
a 10 — 30C range to deliver correct measurement results. General
diagnostics support Samples are measured according to color,
turbidity and abnormal coloration detection. These capabilities
eliminate the need for visual evaluation and provide useful
information for basing results. Color-tone measurement The
instrument examines the color of the sample by measuring contrast
and hue. It evaluates 23 colors (see page 1-00). Turbidity
measurement The instrument measures turbidity and evaluates samples
as clear, turbid or dense Abnormal coloration detection The
instrument automatically detects false positive reactions of
reagent pads caused by drug-administered urine and notifies you by
adding a ! to printed measurement results. Memory capacity for
measurement results of 2,500 samples Measurement results for a
total of 2,500 samples, between normal measurements and STAT
measurements, turbid. samples against evaluations on printed

can be stored in memory. These results can be displayed, printed
and sent to an external device as necessary. As new data is
recorded above 2,500 samples, the old data is sequentially deleted.
Up to 200 control

1-2

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer measurements, 50 check
measurements and 100 troubles Management by barcode possible can be
logged.

AX-4030 Service Manual

Measurement results can be managed by ID using an optional
barcode reader (built-in or hand-held a barcode label is affixed to
the sample tube ahead of time, the barcode is read during assigned
to the measurement results as an ID. 2-way/1-way online
communications The instrument can be connected to an external
device for 2-way or 1-way communications. It can as a component in
an online network configuration

type). If

measurement and

operate

1-3

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

AX-4030 Service Manual

2. SpecificationsSpecifications Product Sample Reagent : AUTION
MAX AX-4030 : Urine : AUTION MAX test strips Configuration :
Instrument, sampler, and accessories

Instrument specifications Measurement items : GLU (Glucose), PRO
(Protein), BIL (bilirubin), URO (Urobilinogen), PH (pH), BLD
(Blood), KET (Ketones), NIT (Nitrite), LEU (Leukocytes), CRE
(Creatinine), P/C (Protein-to-Creatinine ratio), S.G. (Specific
gravity), turbidity, and color tone Measurement range : Test strip:
Each item has different ranks. S.G.: 1.000 to 1.050 (Resolution:
0.001) Color tone: See the table on 3.Measurement principle.
Turbidity: Three levels including clear, turbid, and excessively
turbid Measurement method : Test strip: Dual-wavelength reflectance
measurement (Single wavelength for BLD) S.G.: Reflection
refractometry Color tone: Light-transmission measurement Turbidity:
Light-scattering measurement Measurement wavelength Sample supply
Test strip reaction Test strip storage Test strip storage capacity
Processing speed Sample consumption Required sample volume Sample
container Applicable racks Sample loading capacity Warm-up time
Display Built-in printer : 5 LED wavelengths (430, 500, 565, 635,
760 nm) : Sampler : About 60 seconds : Two test strip storage
compartments, each of which can contain different test strips :
Max. 200 test strips two storage compartments : 225 sample/hour :
0.90 mL : Min. 2.0 mL : Sample tubes manufactured by Ono
Pharmaceutical Co., LTD. or Equivalent : ARKRAY racks : One-way
feeding (default): Max. 50 samples Loop feeding: Max. 100 samples :
Max. 2 minutes : Large color liquid crystal display (320 240 dots)
: 58-mm width thermal printer paper (24 digits)

1-4

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer Memory capacity : Normal and
STAT measurement: 2500 tests Control measurement: 200 tests Check
measurement: 20 tests Trouble list: 100 tests External output
Communication system Transmission speed Thermal compensation
Operating environment Measurement environment Storage environment
Dimensions Weight DC power requirements (to instrument) Power input
Site location Altitude Pollution degree Over voltage category
Expected life : Max. 300 VA : For indoor use only : 2000 m :2 : II
: 2 ports

AX-4030 Service Manual

(One of these ports can be optionally used as an Ethernet port.)
: Compliant with RS-232C (Switchable between one-way and two-way) :
RS-232C: Selectable from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
bps Ethernet: 10BASE-T : Supported : Temperature: 10 — 30C;
Humidity: 20 — 80% RH (Non-condensing) : Temperature: 10 — 30C;
Humidity: 30 — 60% RH (Non-condensing) : Temperature: 10 — 30C;
Humidity: 20 — 80% RH (Non-condensing) : 530 (W) 530 (D) 530 (H) mm
: Instrument: approx. 31 kg, Sampler: approx. 4 kg : 100 — 240 V
AC, 50 — 60 Hz

: 5 years from first use (installation) of instrument (According
to company data)

1-5

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

AX-4030 Service Manual

3. Measurement PrincipleThis instrument measures
purpose-specific test strips by dual-wavelength reflectance
measurement (single wavelength for BLD) and urine specific gravity
(S. G.) by reflection refractometry. This section explains the
principles for measuring test strips, specific gravity, color and
turbidity.

Test Strip MeasurementTest strips loaded in the feeder are sent
one at a time to the tray inside the instrument and carried to the
sample staining position by the introduction arm. At the sample
staining position, the nozzle that aspirated the sample from the
sample tube in the sampler stains each reagent pad (each
measurement item) of the test strip. Once stained, the test strip
is transported to the optical block. Within about 60 sec of
staining, the test strip reacts and changes color, therefore its
reflectivity is measured in that moment. When measurement has been
completed, the test strip is discarded in the waste box. The
measurement unit irradiates the reagent pad with light of 2
wavelengths from a 5-wavelength LED, the reflected light of which
is picked up by a single detector *. Moreover, by measuring the
reflectivity of the color correction pad of the test strip,
destabilizing factors such as the amount of reflected light and
colored samples are corrected.* The irradiated wavelength
combinations differ according to measurement item.

Wavelengths by measurement item

Reflectivity is measured with the following formula. R = (Tm Cs)
/ (Ts Cm) R : Reflectivity Tm : Amount of reflected light coming
from reagent pad at measurement wavelength Ts : Amount of reflected
light coming from reagent pad at standard wavelength Cm : Amount of
reflected light coming from color correction pad at measurement
wavelength Cs : Amount of reflected light coming from color
correction pad at standard wavelength

However, BLD is measured with only one wavelength and calculated
with the below formula. R = Tm / Cm

1-6

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer P/C is measured and calculated
with the below formula. RP/C = (100 RPRO) / RCRE

AX-4030 Service Manual

These reflectivities R are compared against calibration curves
stored in the instrument and output as measurement results. Also,
temperature is corrected to eliminate changes caused by
environmental temperature.

Specific Gravity (S. G.) MeasurementSpecific gravity of a urine
sample is obtained by measuring the refraction of the sample using
a prism and subjecting results to a calculation formula (reflection
refractometry). The light from an LED passes through the prism and
is reflected on the prism face contacting the sample. The light
reflected off the prism is collimated into a thin beam by passing
through a slit and directed to a detector (CCD image sensor). At
this point, the refractive index at the interface between the prism
face and sample will change according to the specific gravity,
therefore the position of the incident light from the slit will
change. The refractive index is obtained by detecting the position
of the incident light and, after correcting it for temperature
effects, it is converted into a Brix value. The specific gravity of
the sample is then obtained using this Brix value and a conversion
formula.

Specific gravity is calculated as follows. 1. The specific
gravity of the sample is calculated. SGx = 1 + (4/900) * Brix value
(However, specific gravity is equal to 1,000 if the Brix value is
below 0.) 2. Correction coefficients a and b are calculated from
the low and high specific gravity values obtained from S. G.
calibration. a = SGL SGH KL KH b = SGL (a KL)

1-7

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

AX-4030 Service Manual

3. The obtained specific gravity value of the sample is
corrected using correction coefficients a and b. SGx = a SGx + b
SGx : Samples specific gravity after calibration correction SGx :
Samples specific gravity before calibration correction SGH :
Specific gravity reference of standard solution (high) SGL :
Specific gravity reference of standard solution (low) KH : Specific
gravity of standard solution (high) KL : Specific gravity of
standard solution (low) Furthermore, high concentrations of glucose
(GLU) and protein (PRO) will affect specific gravity. Therefore,
specific gravity is corrected using the concentrations of glucose
and protein obtained from test strip measurement. SG = SGx CGLU
CPRO SG : Specific gravity after GLU and PRO correction SGx :
Specific gravity obtained from formula 3. CGLU : Corrected GLU
value CPRO : Corrected PRO value Correction values (Unit of
concentration : mg/dL)

Color-Tone MeasurementAn internal turbidity/color measurement
unit measures sample color using transmitted light.

1-8

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer In color-tone measurement, red
(635 nm), green (535 nm) and blue (470 nm) lights are irradiated on
the sample in the cylindrical tube and the hue and contrast of the
sample are obtained from the amount of transmitted light. The color
is evaluated against 23 standard colors consisting of light, normal
and dark shades of yellow, orange, brown, red, violet, blue and
green (21 total), plus colorless and other.

AX-4030 Service Manual

Hue is obtained from the areas in the coordinate system at
right. Coordinates are calculated with the below formulas.

1. XVZ stimulus is obtained. X = ( (a R) + (b G) + (c B) ) 1000
Y = ( (d R) + (e G) + (f B) ) 1000 Z = ( (g G) + (h B) ) 1000 R :
Transmission intensity of 635 nm light G : Transmission intensity
of 535 nm light B : Transmission intensity of 470 nm light a to h :
Correction coefficients 2. The x and y color coordinates are
obtained from 1. x = X (X + Y + Z) y = Y (X + Y + Z) 3. The density
is obtained from formula 2. (x2 + y2) formula

1-9

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

AX-4030 Service Manual

Turbidity MeasurementAn internal turbidity/color measurement
unit measures sample turbidity using transmitted and scattered
lights

Light of 635 nm is irradiated on the sample in the cylindrical
cell and turbidity is calculated using the below formula.

T : Turbidity Ss : Scattered light of sample Ts : Transmitted
light of sample Sw : Scattered light of washing solution Tw :
Transmitted light of washing solution K : Factory-set instrument
coefficient

Turbidity is determined by the obtained T value

* (Level 1) and (Level 2) are constants.

1-10

Chapter 1 Outline of the Analyzer

AX-4030 Service Manual

4. Appearance sketchDesign sketch

1-11

AX-4030 Service Manual

Chapter 21. 2.

System Configuration

3. 4.

5.

Assembly Flowchart
……………………………………………………………………………………………………..
2 Development Drawing
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..
5 1) Main body assembly
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….5
2) Rear Panel Assembly
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..7
3) Main Body Frame Assembly (Right Side)
…………………………………………………………………………….8
4) Main Body Frame Assembly (Left Side)
……………………………………………………………………………..10
5) Front Panel
Assembly………………………………………………………………………………………………………13
6) Test Strip Feeder Section Assembly
………………………………………………………………………………….14
7) Feeder Upper Portion Assembly
……………………………………………………………………………………….16
Drum Unit Assembly
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..17
9) Feeder Lower Portion Assembly
……………………………………………………………………………………….18
10) Pump Section
Assembly……………………………………………………………………………………………….19
11) Pump Unit
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..20
12) Test Strip Identification Section Assembly
………………………………………………………………………21
13) Drain Tubing
Assembly…………………………………………………………………………………………………23
14) Air Pump
Assembly………………………………………………………………………………………………………24
15) Test Strip Introduction Section
Assembly………………………………………………………………………..25
16) Interlock Assembly(B.LID)
…………………………………………………………………………………………….26
17) Feeder Cover Anchoring Section
Assembly…………………………………………………………………….27
18) Interlock
Assembly(R)…………………………………………………………………………………………………..28
19) Operation Section Assembly
…………………………………………………………………………………………29
20) Washing Bath
Assembly……………………………………………………………………………………………….30
21) S.G. and Turbidity Optical Unit Assembly
……………………………………………………………………….31
22) Printer assembly
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….33
23) Nozzle Drive
Assembly…………………………………………………………………………………………………34
24) Up-and-down Drive Assembly
……………………………………………………………………………………….36
25) Sampler sub-CPU
assembly………………………………………………………………………………………….38
26) Test Strip Reaction Section Assembly
……………………………………………………………………………39
27) Test Strip Optical Unit Assembly
……………………………………………………………………………………40
28) Test Strip Transport Section Assembly
…………………………………………………………………………..42
29) Tubing Base Assembly
…………………………………………………………………………………………………44
30) Base Plate Box A Assembly
………………………………………………………………………………………….45
31) Base Plate Box B
assembly…………………………………………………………………………………………..46
32) Power Box Assembly
……………………………………………………………………………………………………48
33) Interlock Assembly(F)
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..49
34) Sample Supply Section Assembly
………………………………………………………………………………….50
35) Chassis
Assembly………………………………………………………………………………………………………..52
36) Top Base Right Assembly
…………………………………………………………………………………………….53
37) Top Base Left
Assembly……………………………………………………………………………………………….54
Diagram………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
55 Tubing System Diagram
………………………………………………………………………………………………
56 1) Tubing System Parts
List………………………………………………………………………………………………….56
2) Tubing System Diagram
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..57
Operation Sequence Chart
…………………………………………………………………………………………..
58

2-1

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

1. Assembly FlowchartMain body assembly Main body frame assembly
Interlock assembly (F) Interlock assembly (R) Interlock assembly
(B.LID) Feeder cover anchoring plate assembly Interlock sensor
assembly Power box assembly Base plate Box B assembly Sampler
sub-CPU assembly Waste box assembly Nozzle drive assembly
Up-and-down drive assembly Test strip reaction section assembly
Test strip transport section assembly Chuck section assembly Test
strip optical unit assembly Optical block assembly Base plate Box A
assembly Tubing base assembly Manifold (pump) assembly S.G. and
turbidity optical unit assembly Top base right assembly Top base
left assembly Sampler Sample supply section assembly Chassis
assembly

2-2

Chapter 2 System Configuration Manual

AX-4030 Service ManualS.G. hydrometer base assembly S.G. and
turbidity flow cell assembly Flow cell assembly (bonded) Turbidity
detector assembly

AX-4030 Service

Printer assembly Drain tubing assembly Air pump assembly Test
strip introduction section assembly Arm assembly Test strip
identification section assembly Pump section assembly Pump unit
Decompression bottle assembly Test strip feeder section assembly
Drum unit assembly Lower portion assembly (Feeder) Drum motor
assembly Reverse drum motor assembly Upper portion assembly
(Feeder) Eject section assembly Washing bath assembly Bottle sensor
printed board assembly

2-3

Chapter 2 System Configuration ManualBridge connection printed
circuit board RS-232C printed circuit board Front panel
assembly

AX-4030 Service Manual

AX-4030 Service

Sample tube sensor assembly Nozzle assembly Operation section
assembly Rear panel assembly Bottle unit

2-4

Chapter 2

System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

2. Development Drawing(1) Main body assembly[NOTE] The figure
shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring
detached. Disassembly procedure No. (1) Assembly standard Main body
power adjustment Main body pulse adjustment Calibration for
turbidity and Hb measurement Unit positioning

2-5

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Bottle unit 2 1 Sampler 3 1 Main body
frame assembly 4 1 Upper cover assembly 5 1 Feeder protective cover
assembly 6 1 Side cover assembly 1 Center panel 7 Cross recessed
head screws with 2 captive washer (sems) 1 Left side panel assembly
8 Cross recessed head screws with 2 captive washer (sems) 9 1 Front
cover assembly 10 1 Bottle tray lid assembly 1 Rear panel assembly
Cross recessed head screws with 2 11 captive washer (sems) Cross
recessed head screws with 9 captive washer (sems) Model and
specifications Code M3x6 SUS M3x10 SUS M3x6 SUS Qty. —

M3x6 SUS

2-6

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(2) Rear Panel Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) No. (2) Assembly standard —

Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Fan motor wiring 2 1 Finger guard
Cross recessed head screws with 3 4 captive washer (sems) 4 4
Hexagon nuts

Model and specifications F80UL guard M3x10 SUS M3 SUS

Code 96565 —

Qty. 1 —

2-7

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(3) Main Body Frame Assembly (Right Side)[NOTE] The figure shown
below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) No. (3) Assembly standard Main body power
adjustment Main body pulse adjustment Calibration for turbidity and
Hb measurement Unit positioning

2-8

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 Front panel assembly 1 Cross recessed
head screws with 4 captive washer (sems) (small) 1 Test strip
feeder assembly 2 Cross recessed head screws with 3 captive washer
(sems) 3 1 Introduction tray 1 Arm assembly 4 Cross recessed head
screws with 2 captive washer (sems) (small) 1 Anchoring plate
assembly 5 Cross recessed head screws with 2 captive washer (sems)
6 1 Decompression bottle assembly 1 Pump section assembly 7 Cross
recessed head screws with 4 captive washer (sems) 1 Identification
section cover 8 Cross recessed head screws with 3 captive washer
(sems) Test strip identification section 1 assembly 9 Cross
recessed head screws with 2 captive washer (sems) 4 Socket screw 1
Air pump assembly 10 Cross recessed head screws with 2 captive
washer (sems) 1 Drain tubing assembly 11 Socket screw with captive
washer 2 (sems)(small) 1 Feeder hinge base Test strip introduction
section 1 12 assembly Cross recessed head screws with 10 captive
washer (sems)(small) 13 1 Interlock cover 1 Interlock assembly
(B.LID) 14 Cross recessed head screws with 2 captive washer
(sems)(small) Feeder cover anchoring section 1 assembly 15 Socket
screw with captive washer 2 (sems) 1 Interlock assembly(R) 16 Cross
recessed head screws with 2 captive washer (sems)(small) Model and
specifications M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS Code 96606 96570 80073 96576 M3x6
SUS M3x6 SUS 96608 M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS 96578 M3x8 SUS M2x8 SUS M3x6
SUS M3x6 SUS 96575 M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS Qty. 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 —

2-9

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(4) Main Body Frame Assembly (Left Side)[NOTE] The figure shown
below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (4) Assembly standard
Main body power adjustment Main body pulse adjustment Calibration
for turbidity and Hb measurement Unit positioning

2-10

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 Antirotation block 1 Socket screw with
captive washer 1 (sems)(small) 2 1 Nozzle assembly 3 1 Transport
tray 1 Operation section assembly 4 Cross recessed head screws with
3 captive washer (sems) 1 Washing bath assembly 5 Socket screw with
captive washer 2 (sems)(small) Operation section reinforcing panel
1 assembly 6 Socket screw with captive washer 3 (sems)(small) 1
S.G. and turbidity optical unit assembly Socket screw with captive
washer 2 7 (sems)(small) Socket screw with captive washer 2
(sems)(small) 1 Base plate cover Socket screw with captive washer 8
3 (sems) 1 Urea screw 1 Printer assembly 9 Cross recessed head
screws with 3 captive washer (sems) 1 Nozzle drive assembly 3
Socket screw 10 Socket screw with captive washer 2 (sems)(small) 1
Sampler sub-CPU assembly 11 Socket screw with captive washer 2
(sems)(small) 1 Test strip reaction section assembly 12 Socket
screw with captive washer 4 (sems)(small) 1 Waste box assembly 13
Socket screw with captive washer 2 (sems) 1 Tubing base assembly
Cross recessed head screws with 1 14 captive washer (sems) Cross
recessed head screws with 2 captive washer (sems)(small) 1 Base
plate Box A assembly 15 Cross recessed head screws with 4 captive
washer (sems) 1 Base plate Box B assembly 16 Cross recessed head
screws with 6 captive washer (sems) Model and specifications M3x10
SUS Code 96590 80074 96569 M3x6 SUS M3x10 SUS 96604 M3x6 SUS M3x6
SUS M3x10 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x6 No.1, white M3x6 SUS M3x8 SUS M3x10 SUS
M3x6 SUS M4x10 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x10 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS
96593 96587 96580 Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 —

2-11

Chapter 2 System Configuration 17 1 5 1 18 2 1 19 2 1 20 2 1 21
2 Power box assembly Cross recessed head screws with captive washer
(sems) Bottle sensor printed board assembly Cross recessed head
screws with captive washer (sems)(small) RS-232C printed circuit
board Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)
Bridge connection printed circuit board Cross recessed head screws
with captive washer (sems)(small) Interlock assembly (F) Cross
recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)

AX-4030 Service Manual M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x6 SUS 96623 M3x6 SUS
M3x6 SUS 1 —

2-12

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(5) Front Panel Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (3) No. (5) Assembly standard Sample tube sensor
positioning

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 Part name Cross
recessed head screws with captive washer (sems) White plate removal
panel Socket screw with captive washer (sems) Sample tube sensor
holder Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)
Sensor wiring Aperture plate BCR bracket Cross recessed head screws
with captive washer (sems)(small) Model and specifications M3x6 SUS
M3x6 SUS M3x8 SUS Code 96607 M3x6 SUS Qty. 1 —

2-13

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(6) Test Strip Feeder Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown
below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (6) Assembly standard
Reflection system sensors positioning Belt tension adjustment

2-14

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Eject section assembly 1 Wiring cover 2
Cross recessed head screws with 2 captive washer (sems)(small) 1
Base plate cover 3 Cross recessed head screws with 5 captive washer
(sems)(small) 1 Upper portion assembly Socket screw with captive
washer 4 4 (sems)(small) Socket screw with captive washer 4
(sems)(small) 5 1 Drum unit assembly 6 1 Lower portion assembly 1
Shutter (0) 7 Cross recessed head screws with 2 captive washer
(sems)(small) 4 PI printed circuit board 8 8 Round head screw 9 1
Power grip GT belt 10 1 Power grip GT belt Model and specifications
Code M3x8 SUS M3x8 SUS M3x16 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x4 SUS 184-2GT-4
128-2GT-4 96632 Qty. 1 —

M3x6 SUS

2-15

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(7) Feeder Upper Portion Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below
is a development drawing unit with the wiring detached. Disassembly
procedure (1), (3), and then (6) No. (7) Assembly standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 3 2 2 Part name Cross recessed head screws with
captive washer (sems)(small) Cross recessed head screws with
captive washer (sems)(small) Switch wiring Model and specifications
M3x6 SUS M3x10 SUS Code 96572 Qty. 1

2-16

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(8) Drum Unit Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1), (3), and then (6) No. (8) Assembly standard Reflection system
sensors positioning

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 4 4 Part name Cross recessed head screws with
captive washer (sems) Reflection system sensors assembly Model and
specifications M3x16 SUS Code 96571 Qty. 1

2-17

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(9) Feeder Lower Portion Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below
is a development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly
procedure (1), (3), and then (6) No. (9) Assembly standard —

r [NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 Part name Cross
recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) Base
assembly Motor holder (RD) Cross recessed head screws with captive
washer (sems)(small) Socket set screw Drive pulley A Motor wiring
Pulley (2GT-18) Motor wiring Model and specifications M3x6 SUS Code
M2.5×6 SUS M3x4 S (black) WP 96574 96573 Qty. 1 1

2-18

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(10) Pump Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (10) Assembly standard
—

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 3 1 4 1 Part name Socket screw with captive
washer (sems) Pump unit Socket screw with captive washer
(sems)(small) Fan motor wiring Model and specifications M3x6 SUS
M3x8 SUS Code 96601 96567 Qty. 1 1

2-19

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(11) Pump Unit[NOTE] The figure shown below is a development
drawing with the tubing and wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1), (3), and then (10) No. (11) Assembly standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 2 1 1 1 4 Part name Socket screw with
captive washer (sems) Cross recessed head screws with captive
washer (sems)(small) Valve wiring Sampling pump Washing solution
pump 3 PEEK joint Model and specifications M3x6 SUS M2x12 SUS Code
96600 96603 96602 96614 Qty. 1 1 1 1

2-20

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(12) Test Strip Identification Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure
shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (12) Assembly standard
Belt tension adjustment Reflection system sensors positioning

2-21

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 1 2 2 9 1 2 1 2 1 1 1
Part name Socket screw with captive washer (sems) Detector cover
Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)
Reflection system sensors assembly Cross recessed head screws with
captive washer (sems) Coated clip Test strip identification section
relay printed circuit board PI printed circuit board Socket set
screw Pulley (2GT-18) Stepping motor Power grip GT belt Model and
specifications M3x6 SUS M3x16 SUS Code 96571 M3x6 SUS CS-1U 96628
M3x4 S (black) WP 96632 96579 Qty. 1 1 1 1 —

502-2GT-4

2-22

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(13) Drain Tubing Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (13) Assembly standard
—

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Pump wiring Cross recessed head screws
with 2 6 captive washer (sems) 3 1 Pinch valve joint anchoring
plate 4 2 Mini fitting 5 2 Valve wiring 6 1 Mini fitting 7 2 Mini
fitting Model and specifications M3x10 SUS For VFI226 2.5-2.5 For
VFT236 2.5×2-3.0 For VFI346 3.0-4.0 Code 96568 96634 96613 96633
Qty. 1 1 1 1

2-23

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(14) Air Pump Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (14) Assembly standard
—

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 1 1 Part name Cross recessed head screws with
captive washer (sems)(small) Pump wiring Air pump cover Model and
specifications M3x6 SUS Code Qty. —

2-24

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(15) Test Strip Introduction Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure
shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (15) Assembly standard
Belt tension adjustment

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 4 1 1 2 1 1 Part name Cross recessed
head screws with captive washer (sems) Cross recessed head screws
with captive washer (sems)(small) Motor assembly (bonded) Power
grip GT belt Round head screw PI printed circuit board Test strip
introduction drive assembly Model and specifications M3x6 SUS M3x6
SUS 460-2GT-4 M3x4 SUS Code 96577 96632 Qty. 1 1 —

2-25

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(16) Interlock Assembly(B.LID)[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (3) No. (16) Assembly standard —

Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 2 1

Part name Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)
(small) Interlock wiring

Model and specifications M2x8 SUS

Code 96612

Qty. 1

2-26

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(17) Feeder Cover Anchoring Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure
shown below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (3) No. (17) Assembly standard
Outer cover open-closed detectors positioning

Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 2 2 1

Part name Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)
Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)
Interlock wiring

Model and specifications M3x6 SUS M2x8 SUS

Code 96611

Qty. 1

2-27

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(18) Interlock Assembly(R)[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (3) No. (18) Assembly standard —

Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 2 1

Part name Cross recessed head screws with captive washer
(sems)(small) Interlock wiring

Model and specifications M2x8 SUS

Code 96610

Qty. 1

2-28

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(19) Operation Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is
a development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly
procedure (1) and then (4) No. (19) Assembly standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 6 1 1 Part name Cross recessed head screws with
captive washer (sems) Panel relay printed circuit board VR printed
circuit board Model and specifications M3x6 SUS Code 96629 96627
Qty. 1 1

2-29

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(20) Washing Bath Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1), (3), and then (4) No. (20) Assembly
standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Adapter fitting 2 1 O ring Model and
specifications VFM6206 Wire diameter1.6 — inner diameter2.0
(fluorine) Code 96605 Qty. 1

2-30

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(21) S.G. and Turbidity Optical Unit Assembly[NOTE] The figure
shown below is a development drawing with the tubing and wiring
detached. Disassembly procedure (1) and then (4) No. (21) Assembly
standard —

2-31

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 6 1
2 2 5 1 Part name Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small)
Mounting hardware Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small)
Valve wiring Flow cell assembly (bonded) Elliptic rubber packing
Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)
Turbidity detector assembly Cross recessed head screws with captive
washer (sems)(small) Head amplifier cover Stainless spacer Spring
lock washer Coated clip S.G. hydrometer base assembly Model and
specifications M3x6 SUS M3x10 SUS Code 96596 96597 M2x10 SUS M3x6
SUS BSU-335 M3 SUS CS-1U 96595 96594 Qty. 1 1 1 1

2-32

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(22) Printer assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure (1) and then (4)

No. (22)

Assembly standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching the printer
relay printed circuit board. Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 1 4 1 1
3 1 Part name Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small)
Printer relay printed circuit board P tight Paper cutter Eject
button Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)
Thermal line printer Model and specifications M3x6 SUS M3x8 S (Zn)
Code 96631 Qty. 1 —

M2x8 SUS LTPH245 (platen block)

2-33

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(23) Nozzle Drive Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure (1), (3), and then (4)

No. (23)

Assembly standard Belt tension adjustment

2-34

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 1 6 1 1 1 2 1 1 Part name
Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) Nozzle
relay printed circuit board CU joiner Cross recessed head screws
with captive washer (sems) Liquid level cover Up-and-down drive
assembly Motor wiring Socket set screw Pulley (P20-2GT) Power grip
GT belt Model and specifications M3x6 SUS EYHCUJ1.25-32G700-7S5W
M3x6 SUS Code 96617 96591 96588 Qty. 1 1 1 —

M3x4 S (black) WP 690-2GT-6

2-35

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(24) Up-and-down Drive Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is
a development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure (1), (3), (4), and then (23)

No. (24)

Assembly standard Belt tension adjustment

2-36

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 CU joiner 2 6 Round head screw 3 3 PI
printed circuit board Socket screw with captive washer 4 1
(sems)(small) 5 1 Belt presser foot Cross recessed head screws with
6 7 captive washer (sems)(small) 7 2 Socket set screw 8 1 Pulley
(P20-2GT) 9 1 5-phase stepping motor Socket screw with captive
washer 10 4 (sems)(small) Liquid sensor printed circuit board 11 1
assembly 12 1 Power grip GT belt Model and specifications
EYFCUJ1.0-8G300-7S5W M3x4 SUS M3x6 SUS M2.5×6 SUS M3x4 S (black) WP
Code 96592 96632 96589 96616 460-2GT-4 Qty. 1 1 1 1 —

M3x8 SUS

2-37

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(25) Sampler sub-CPU assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (4) No. (25) Assembly standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching the sampler
sub-CPU printed circuit board. Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 5 1 Part name
Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small)
Sampler sub-CPU printed circuit board Model and specifications M3x6
SUS Code 96615 Qty. 1

2-38

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(26) Test Strip Reaction Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown
below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1), (3), and then (4) No. (26) Assembly
standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Part name Socket
screw with captive washer (sems) Test strip disposal guide Cross
recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) Photo
reflector P tight Reaction section cover Test strip optical unit
assembly Cross recessed head screws with captive washer
(sems)(small) Test strip transport section assembly Model and
specifications M3x6 SUS M3x14 SUS M3x8 S(Zn) Code 96583 96581 Qty.
1 1

M3x6 SUS

2-39

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(27) Test Strip Optical Unit Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown
below is a development drawing with the wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1), (3), (4), and then (26) No. (27)
Assembly standard —

2-40

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 CU joiner 2 3 P tight 3 2 Countersunk
head screw Optical system base (R), 4 1 additional working 5 1
Optical block assembly 6 1 PI printed circuit board Cross recessed
head screws with 7 3 captive washer (sems)(small) 8 2 Socket set
screw 9 1 Pulley (2GT-18) 10 4 Round head screw 11 4 Spring lock
washer 12 1 Motor holder 13 1 Motor wiring Cross recessed head
screws with 14 1 captive washer (sems)(small) 15 1 Photo reflector
16 1 Timing belt Model and specifications EYFCUJ1.0-26G500-15S5W
M3x8 S(Zn) M3x6 SUS Code 96586 96584 96632 M3x12 SUS M3x4 S (black)
WP M2.5X4 SUS M2.5 SUS 96585 Qty. 1 1 1 1 —

M3x14 SUS 336-2GT-4

2-41

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(28) Test Strip Transport Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure
shown below is a development drawing with wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1), (3), (4), and then (26) No. (28)
Assembly standard —

2-42

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 2 Round head screw 2 1 PI printed circuit
board Cross recessed head screws with 3 8 captive washer
(sems)(small) 4 1 Transport section bracket 5 4 P tight 6 1 Outer
base 7 1 Guide plate 8 1 Chuck section assembly 9 1 Right-left arm
10 1 OILES #80 flange bush 11 1 Pushup plate 12 3 Socket set screw
13 1 Cam 14 1 PI shutter 15 1 E-shaped retaining ring 16 1 Shutter
holder 17 1 OILES #80 bush 18 2 Socket set screw 19 2 Stainless
spur gear 20 1 Motor shaft 21 1 Motor base 22 1 Motor wiring Model
and specifications M3X4 SUS M3x6 SUS M3x8 S(Zn) Code 96632 96582
Qty. 1 1

80F-0303 M3x4 S (black) WP

4 (SUS) 80B-0608 M4x4 S (black) WP S50SU40B+0506

2-43

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(29) Tubing Base Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the tubing and wiring detached.
Disassembly procedure (1) and then (4) No. (29) Assembly standard
—

[NOTE] Be careful of the connectors when detaching each unit.
Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 4 2 1 1 1 Part name Cross recessed head screws
with captive washer (sems)(small) Manifold (pump) assembly Valve
wiring Valve wiring Model and specifications M3x20 SUS Code 96598
96599 96600 Qty. 1 1 1

2-44

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(30) Base Plate Box A Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached.

Disassembly procedure (1) and then (4)

No. (30)

Assembly standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching each base
plate. Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 8 1 1 Part name Model and specifications
Cross recessed head screws with M3x6 SUS captive washer
(sems)(small) Panel sub-CPU printed circuit board Main CPU printed
circuit board Code 96626 96619 Qty. 1 1

2-45

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(31) Base Plate Box B assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (4) No. (31) Assembly standard —

2-46

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching each base
plate. Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 4 1 4 4 5 1 4 2 4 4 Part name
Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) Nozzle driver base
plate Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) Nozzle driver
printed circuit board Cross recessed head screws with captive
washer (sems)(small) Qualitative analysis machine driver printed
circuit board Cross recessed head screws with captive washer
(sems)(small) Qualitative analysis machine AD sub-CPU printed
circuit board Stainless spacer PMC sub-CPU printed circuit board
Stainless spacer Cross recessed head screws with captive washer
(sems)(small) Model and specifications M3x6 SUS M3x8 SUS M3x6 SUS
Code 96618 96622 M3x6 SUS 96621 BSU-330 BSU-330 M3x6 SUS 96620 Qty.
1 1 1 1 —

6

2-47

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(32) Power Box Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached.. Disassembly
procedure (1) and then (4) No. (32) Assembly standard —

[NOTE] Be careful of the connector when detaching Ref. No. Qty.
1 1 6 1 2 4 Part name Power supply relay printed circuit board
Cross recessed head screws with captive washer (sems)(small) Fan
motor wiring Socket screw with captive washer (sems)(small) Model
and specifications Code 96624 M3x6 SUS M3x8 SUS 96566 Qty. 1 1
—

2-48

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(33) Interlock Assembly(F)[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (4) No. (33) Assembly standard —

Ref. No. Qty. 1 2 2 1

Part name Cross recessed head screws with captive washer
(sems)(small) Interlock wiring

Model and specifications M2x8 SUS

Code 96609

Qty. 1

2-49

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(34) Sample Supply Section Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below
is a development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly
procedure No. Assembly standard Measurement side lever PI
adjustment Measurement side lever interlock adjustment STAT port
holder height adjustment Rack ID sensor sensitivity adjustment
Sensor panel angle adjustment

(1)

(34)

2-50

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

[NOTE] 1. Be careful of the motor wiring and extra wiring when
detaching the top base right assembly. 2. Be careful of the motor
wiring when detaching the top base left assembly.

Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Chassis assembly 2 1 Top base right
assembly 3 1 Top base left assembly 4 1 STAT port assembly 5 1
Front cover 6 1 Side panel (right) 7 1 Side panel (left) 8 2 Rack
presser foot 9 1 STAT port cover Cross recessed head screws with 10
21 captive washer (sems)(small) 11 4 Truss screw 12 4 Toothed lock
washer

Model and specifications

Code 95345 95346 95347 —

Qty. 1 1 1 —

M3x8(SUS) M3x16(SUS) M3

2-51

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(35) Chassis Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (34) No. (35) Assembly standard Belt tension
adjustment Lateral feed lever angle adjustment

Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Sampler 1 printed board 2 1 Sampler
2 printed board 3 1 Motor wiring S1 4 1 Motor wiring S2 5 2 Timing
belt Cross recessed head screws with 6 4 captive washer
(sems)(small)

Model and specifications

Code 95348 95349 95351 95352 95354 —

Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 —

M3x6(SUS)

2-52

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(36) Top Base Right Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (34) No. (36) Assembly standard Belt tension
adjustment Belt snaking adjustment Longitudinal feed pulley height
adjustment

Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Motor wiring S3 2 1 Sampler 3
printed board 3 1 Base plate spacer A 4 1 Base plate spacer B 5 2
Power grip GT belt 6 2 P tight 7 1 P tight 8 3 Flat washer (round)
9 3 O ring

Model and specifications

M3x8 S(Zn) M3x10 S(Zn) M3 SUS IN-3 silicon

Code 95353 95350 95355 —

Qty. 1 1 1 —

2-53

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

(37) Top Base Left Assembly[NOTE] The figure shown below is a
development drawing with the wiring detached. Disassembly procedure
(1) and then (34) No. (37) Assembly standard Belt tension
adjustment Belt snaking adjustment Longitudinal feed pulley level
adjustment

Ref. No. Qty. Part name 1 1 Motor wiring S3 2 1 Power grip GT
belt

Model and specifications

Code 95353 95355

Qty. 1 1

2-54

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

3. Diagram

Printer

Sheet keys

LCD

Hand-held barcode reader

Panel CPU

S.G. and turbidity optical unit

External output

Driving sub-CPU

Main CPU

Test strip feeders

PMC

A/D sub-CPU

Sampler sub-CPU

Introduction section

Nozzle drive section Washing bath Liquid detection

Pump

section

Optical unit

Sampler ()

Transport section

Washing solution bottle

Barcode reader

Drain bottle

2-55

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

4. Tubing System Diagram(1) Tubing System Parts ListItem No.
Parts Specification Qty

1 1′ 1» 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22

Teflon tube Silicon tube Silicon tube Silicon tube Teflon tube
Teflon tube Teflon tube Teflon tube Silicon tube Tygon tube Silicon
tube Silicon tube Two-way joint Silicon tube Three-way joint
Silicon tube Silicon tube Silicon tube Silicon tube Two-way joint
PharMed tube Silicon tube Silicon tube Silicon tube

1.0X1.6X425 175mm (Nozzle included) 2.0X4.0X160 2.0X4.0X50
1.15X3.2X110 2.1X3.10.05X590 2.1X3.10.05X350 2.1X3.10.05X140
2.1X3.10.05X630 2.0X4.0X690 1/16X3/16X 1000 2.0X4.0X430 2.0X4.0X350
VFI226 (2.5-2.5 ID) 2.0X4.0X100 VFT236 (2.52-3.0 ID) 3.0X6.0X540
3.0X6.0X310 3.0X6.0X320 3.0X6.0X450 VFI246(3.0-4.0 ID)
4.76X8.0(X135) 3.0X6.0X500 3.0X6.0X1000 7.0X10X400

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1

2-56

3V1 Dam valve

1Washing solution pump 4962L Max. suction vol. 4962 L

1′ 2Sampling pump Max. suction

1» 5

(2) Tubing System Diagram

Chapter 2 System Configuration

vol. 236 L 236 L

Air segment group sectionNC NO V3 Sampling

Turbidity meter

4 6NO NC NO

S.G. meter

7

SUS pipe SUS

8

valve

2-5712 17 13 14 18Pulser pump

9 19

11

V2

Air valve 2L

NC V4 Suction pipe Air Air

Washing bath

V6 Overflow valve

Washing solution 2 L

18

20

SUS pipe SUS

22

21Air pump

Overflow

Discharge

15

16

10

3L

Drain 3L

11

12

V5 Drain valve

AX-4030 Service Manual

Drain bottle

Sequence time chart: STAT measurement with Min. sample volume
AX-4030:STATDoc. AX-4030-C-43A-073 No.: AX-4030-C-43A-073Origin
1313mm mm up 5 mm up 5mm Stain: down 11 Stain 11 pads Bottom of
washing bath 8mm 8mm 8 mm up 8 mm up Stain: up

Origin 5 mm up 5mm

Origin

Nozzle up-down

Toward-origin position (Drawn from liquid level) Bottom of Air
segment suction position washing bath Pre-rising position

Sample lowest position

Washing

Washing

Nozzle back-and-forth

Chapter 2 System Configuration

Washing bath

Discharge

Origin

5. Operation Sequence Chart

Suction

Sampling pump

Discharge

Origin

2-58start Black marker reading Sample reading position After
taking back lash After reading black marker

Suction

Closed (ON) (ON)

V1

(OFF) Open (OFF)

(ON) Open (ON)

V2

Closed (OFF) (OFF)

Open (ON) (ON)

V3

Closed (OFF) (OFF)

Open (ON) (ON)

V4

Closed (OFF) (OFF)

Open (ON) (ON)

V5

Closed (OFF) (OFF)

(ON) Open (ON)

V6

Closed (OFF) (OFF)

Transport section

Driving

Stop

Optical Unit

After sample scanning (tip of test strip) Origin

AX-4030 Service Manual

0.000

2.000

4.000

6.000

8.000

10.000

12.000

14.000

16.000

Chapter 2 System Configuration

AX-4030 Service Manual

2-59

Rev. A

AX-4030 Service Manual

Chapter 31. 2.

Operation of Service modeContents

Overview
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….1
Entering and Exiting the Service Mode
…………………………………………………………………………………..2
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. Starting Up the Instrument in
the Service Mode
………………………………………………………………….2
Entering the Service Mode from Standby
…………………………………………………………………………..3
Exiting the Service Mode
…………………………………………………………………………………………………3
Basic Operation: Working with the Menu
Screens……………………………………………………………….4
Basic Operation: Working with the Selection Fields
…………………………………………………………….5
Basic Operation: Working with Numeric Value Entry Fields
………………………………………………….5
Confirmation Saving New
Settings…………………………………………………………………………………….7
Parameter setting
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………8
3.1.1. Rack assignment for test strip
……………………………………………………………………………….8
3.1.2. Result display format
……………………………………………………………………………………………8
3.1.3. Measurement No. setup
……………………………………………………………………………………….8
3.1.4. Print
order…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9
3.1.5. Transmit order
…………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
3.1.6. Rank type
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………11
3.1.7. Strip item
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….15
3.1.8. Control ID
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………16
Results
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..16
3.2.1. Print
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………16
3.2.2.
Transmit……………………………………………………………………………………………………………16
3.2.3. View
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………16
3.2.4. Delete
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………16
3.2.5. Online test
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..16
Initial setting
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………17
3.3.1. System clock
setup…………………………………………………………………………………………….17
3.3.2. Printer setup
……………………………………………………………………………………………………..17
3.3.3. External output
setup………………………………………………………………………………………….18
3.3.4. Beeper volume
setting………………………………………………………………………………………..19
3.3.5. Barcode
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………20
3.3.6. Sampler
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………20
3.3.7. Rack
ID…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….20
3.3.8. Serial
No…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..20
3.3.9. Option
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………21
Print
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….22
3.4.1. Trouble list
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..22
3.4.2. Abnormal results list
…………………………………………………………………………………………..22
3.4.3. Parameter settings
…………………………………………………………………………………………….22
Maintenance…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………23
3.5.1. S.G. cell
washout……………………………………………………………………………………………….23
3.5.2. Clean washing bath and
tray……………………………………………………………………………….23
3.5.3. Check measurement
………………………………………………………………………………………….23
3.5.4. Maintenance information
…………………………………………………………………………………….23
Refresh the setting
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..23
3.6.1. All settings
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..23
3.6.2. Factory
setup…………………………………………………………………………………………………….23
3.6.3. Parameter settings
…………………………………………………………………………………………….23
3.6.4. Initial
settings…………………………………………………………………………………………………….23
3.6.5. Chemical system
……………………………………………………………………………………………….23
System
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..24
3.7.1. Total
counter……………………………………………………………………………………………………..24
3.7.2. Calibration
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..24
3.7.3. Packing
mode……………………………………………………………………………………………………24
3.7.4.
Adjustment………………………………………………………………………………………………………..24
3.7.5. Feeder torque adjust
………………………………………………………………………………………….30
3.7.6. Detail
setting……………………………………………………………………………………………………..30

3.

Configuring the Instrument Using the Menu Options
………………………………………………………………8
3.1.

3.2.

3.3.

3.4.

3.5.

3.6.

3.7.

3-1

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

1. OverviewThis document describes service mode operations of
the fully automated urine analyzer AX-4030. The service mode is
open to the ARKRAY-concerned persons including servicemen and
factory workers only, but not to the users. The messages in this
mode are displayed in English on the models for all countries. The
service mode provides the functions listed below. For information
on the hierarchical structure of the service mode commands, see the
attached document.Menu items Parameter setting Results Initial
setting Print Maintenance Refresh the setting System Descriptions
Sets measurement related parameters. Reviews the results by
displaying, printing, or transmitting them to an external device.
Sets the initial settings of the instrument. Prints information on
instrument status. Performs maintenance of the instrument. Resets
the parameter settings. Tests or adjusts the mechanical systems,
electronic volumes, and other hardware components.

2. Entering and Exiting the Service ModeThis section describes
how to enter and exit the service mode and how to work with the
menu screens and fields that frequently appear in that mode.

2.1. Starting Up the Instrument in the Service Mode1. Holding
down the [STOP] key, turn on the instrument to access the screen
shown below. Type in -4030- and press OK .

Password:

BS

OK

CANCEL

2. The service mode menu screen will appear. Now, the instrument
is in the service mode. Menu (0000) 2005-04-25 13:58

1 Measurement condition 2 Result 3 Initial setting 4 Printing 5
Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7 System

BS

OK

Back 3-2

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

2.2. Entering the Service Mode from Standby1. Press the [STOP]
and [-] keys at the same time. 2. On the screen shown below, type
in -4030- and press OK .

Password:

BS

OK

CANCEL

3. The service mode menu screen will appear. Now, the instrument
is in the service mode. Menu (0000) 1 Parameter setting 2 Results 3
Initial setting 4 Printing 5 Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7
System 2005-04-25 13:58

BS

OK

Back

2.3. Exiting the Service Mode1. On the service mode menu screen,
press Menu (0000) 1 Parameter setting 2 Results 3 Initial setting 4
Printing 5 Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7 System Back .

2005-04-25 13:58

BS

OK

Back

3-3

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

2. If the instrument has started up under the procedure in 2.1
Starting Up the Instrument in the Service Mode, the system startup
initialization will be carried out, and then the standby screen
will appear. [TIP] For information on what appears on the screen at
startup, see the operating manual. If the instrument has entered
the service mode under the procedure in 2.2 Entering the Service
Mode from Standby, the standby screen will appear. Ready for
measurement 2005-04-25 13:58 Measurement start No. 0001 Test strips
in feeder 1 1: 10PA Test strips in feeder 2 2: 10EA

Menu

Meas No.

Strip

S.G. Cal

2.4. Basic Operation: Working with the Menu ScreensThis section
describes the menu screens that frequently appear in the service
mode. In later sections, screen names followed by menu screen refer
to this type of screen. Menu (0000) 1 Parameter setting 2 Results 3
Initial setting 4 Printing 5 Maintenance 6 Refresh the setting 7
System

2005-04-25 13:58

BS

OK

Back

The available keys are listed below. [1] — [7]: Selects the
respective options 1 to 7 shown on the above menu. Back : Exits the
menu.

3-4

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

2.5. Basic Operation: Working with the Selection FieldsThis
section describes the selection fields that frequently appear in
the service mode. In later sections, item names followed by
selection field refer to this type of field. Selectable options
appear in brackets ([ ]). Barcode (3500) Use Start degit Read degit
Miss Read

2005-04-25 13:58 [OFF] < 1> [Pass]

OK

CANCEL

The available keys are listed below. — (hyphen): Displays the
next option. While the last option is being displayed, pressing
this key returns the setting back to the first option. ENTER: Moves
down to the next setup item. : Moves up to the previous setup item.
OK : Confirms the settings on the screen. If one or more changes
have been made, the confirmation window shown in 2.7 Saving New
Settings will appear. CANCEL : Aborts the new settings, recovers
the previous settings, and goes back to the one level higher menu
screen.

2.6. Basic Operation: Working with Numeric Value Entry
FieldsThis section describes the numeric value entry fields that
frequently appear in the service mode. In later sections, item
names followed by entry screen refer to this type of field. These
entry fields can accept numeric values of as many digits as can be
typed in angle brackets (< >). There are no numerical limits
unless specified next to the field. Barcode (3500) Use Start degit
Read degit Miss Read

2005-04-25 13:58 [OFF] < 1> [Pass]

BS

OK

CANCEL

3-5

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

The available keys are listed below. Numeric keys: Shifts the
digit at the ones place to the tens place, and puts the number
corresponding to the pressed numeric key in the ones place.
Overflowed digits are deleted. BS : Deletes a digit. — (hyphen):
Enters a minus sign. [TIP] If the field contains 0 or does not
accept values smaller than 0, the [-] key-in action is ignored.
ENTER: Moves down to the next setup item. : Moves up to the
previous setup item. OK : Confirms the settings on the screen. If
one or more changes have been made, the confirmation window shown
in 2.7 Saving New Settings will appear. CANCEL : Aborts the new
settings, recovers the previous settings, and goes back to the one
level higher menu screen.

3-6

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

2.7. Confirmation Saving New SettingsThis section describes the
confirmation window that frequently appears in the service mode. In
later sections, confirmation window refers to this type of window.
With the confirmation window open, pressing OK saves new settings
(writes them in the flash ROM). Pressing CANCEL aborts the new
settings and recovers the previous settings (in this case, the new
settings are not written in the flash ROM and the previous settings
are maintained). Barcode (3500) Use Start degit Read degit Miss
Read Save setting changes? 2005-04-25 13:58 [OFF] < 1>
[Pass]

BS

OK

CANCEL

While the settings are being written in the flash ROM, a message
window like shown below appears. When writing has been completed,
the previous menu screen will appear again. Barcode (3500) Use
Start degit Read degit Miss Read Saving changes Keep power on.
2005-04-25 13:58 [OFF] < 1> [Pass]

BS

OK

CANCEL

3-7

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

3. Configuring the Instrument Using the Menu OptionsThis section
describes the options listed in each menu screen. The options on
yellow backgrounds can also be accessed in the user mode;
therefore, see the operating manual for how to use these
options.

3.1. Parameter settingThe Parameter setting menu provides
options mainly used for setting the measurement parameters.

3.1.1. Rack assignment for test stripSelect this option to
assign a feeder number (1, 2, or main) to each item rack. For more
information, see the operating manual.

3.1.2. Result display formatSelect Result display format to set
the output format of the measurement results. Sample See the
operating manual. Control measurement See the operating manual.
JCCLS Select whether to output the results in JCCLS-compliant print
format. The selectable options are listed below. OFF: Does not
output in the JCCLS-compliant print format. ON: Outputs in the
JCCLS-compliant print format.

3.1.3. Measurement No. setupSelect this option to make the
settings related to measurement numbers. For more information, see
the operating manual.

3-8

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

3.1.4. Print orderSelect Print order to arrange the order of
measurement items that appear on the printed result reports. The
instructions are described below. 1. On the screen shown below,
select the name of the test strip for which to arrange the order of
the measurement items, and press OK . In this example, test strip
10PA is being selected. Print order (1400) Strip

2005-04-25 13:58 [10PA]

OK

CANCEL

2. Determine the order of each measurement item. Type in the
desired order number (2-digit) number in the entry field for each
measurement item (in this example, GLU is the first and PRO is the
second). The current page number appears at the upper right of the
screen. While the cursor is placed on the lowest line, pressing the
ENTER key switches the pages (in this example, with the cursor
placed on for NIT, pressing the ENTER key proceeds to page 2, and
with the cursor placed on for Turbidity, pressing the ENTER key
returns to page 1).Page 1 Page 2

Print order (1400) GLU PRO URO BIL CRE PH BLD KET NIT

(10PA) (1/2) 2005-04-25 13:58 OK CANCEL

Print order (1400) LEU P/C S.G. Color tone Turbidity

(10PA) (2/2) 2005-04-25 13:58

OK

CANCEL

3-9

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

Invalid number entries are informed by messages. 1. Each entry
field must contain a different number. The following example shows
invalid settings; the PRO, URO, and BLD entry fields all contain
the same number (02). Print order (1400) GLU PRO URO BIL CRE PH BLD
KET NIT OK [TIP] CANCEL (10PA) (1/2) 2005-04-25 13:58

The following message will appear. Input data is wrong.

2. The entries must be serialized. The following example shows
invalid settings; number 7 is skipped. Print order (1400) GLU PRO
URO BIL CRE PH BLD KET NIT OK 3. The maximum number must be 14.
(10PA) (1/2) 2005-04-25 13:58 CANCEL

3.1.5. Transmit orderSelect Transmit order to arrange the order
of measurement items to be transmitted to the external device. The
instructions are the same as those in 3.1.4.Print order; however,
no change can be made for S.G. and Color tone.

3-10

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

3.1.6. Rank typeSelect Rank type to choose a calibration curve.
Changing this setting deletes all of the measurement results from
the backup RAM. The selectable options are listed below. No
calibration curve. This option is selected when all of the
parameter settings are initialized. However, the instrument cannot
perform measurement without a calibration curve. This option is for
protection; it serves the purpose of ensuring that appropriate
shipment destination settings are completed for the instrument.
[Default] AX4030 mg: AX-4030 conventional unit AX4030 SI: AX-4030
SI unit J AX4280 mg: Japan/AX-4280 compatible/conventional unit W
AX4280 mg: All countries except Japan/AX-4280
compatible/conventional unit W AX4280 SI: China and others (except
Japan)/AX-4280 compatible/SI unit J SA4230 mg: Japan/SA-4230
compatible/conventional unit J SA4220S mg: Japan/SA-4220
compatible/conventional unit M SA4220A mg: M company/SA-4220
compatible/conventional unit M SA4220A SI: M company/SA-4220
compatible/SI unit I AX4280 mg: I company/AX-4280
compatible/conventional unit The following table lists detailed
information on each option. Options 1 2[AX4030 mg] [AX4030 SI]

None:

Sales areaAll countries All countries

Rank compatibilityAX-4030 AX-4030

Unit of concentrationConventional (mg/dl) SI (mmol/l)

Applicable test stripsAll types All types 10EA, 9EA, 8EA, 7EA,
6EA, 5EA, 4EA,10PA, 9UB, 8UA, 8UB, 7UA, 7UB, 5UA, 5UB, 4UA 10EA

Remark

3

[J AX4280 mg]

Japan

AX-4280 (AJ-4270)

Conventional (mg/dl)

4 5 6 7 8 9

[W AX4280 mg]

All countries except Japan China and other countries (except
Japan) Japan

AX-4280 (AJ-4270) AX-4280 (AJ-4270) SA-4230

Conventional (mg/dl) SI (mmol/l) Conventional (mg/dl)
Conventional (mg/dl) Conventional (mg/dl) SI (mmol/l) Conventional
(mg/dl)

Differs from 1 only in the applicable test strips. Same as 4
except that concentration is expressed in SI.

[W AX4280 SI]

10EA 9UB, 8UA, 8UB, 7UA, 7UB, 5UA, 5UB, 4UA,10EA 9UB, 8UA, 8UB,
7UA, 7UB, 5UA, 5UB, 4UA,10EA 9UB

[J SA4230 mg]

[J SA4220S mg]

Japan

SA-4220

Rank for Uriflet S specifications Rank for Uriflet A
specifications Same as 6 except that concentration is expressed in
SI. This option differs from 1 only in the applicable test
strips.

[M SA4220A mg]

M company

SA-4220

[M SA4220A SI]

M company

SA-4220 AX-4280 (AJ-4270)

9UB 9EB

10 [I AX4280 mg]

IRIS

[TIP] The threshold for each rank is appended after product
evaluations.

3-11

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

AX-4030 [AX4030 mg] [AX4030 SI]1 GLU Semiquantitative sign
Conventional Conc(mg/dL) SI concentration (mmol/L) PRO
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc(mg/dL) SI concentration
(g/L) BIL Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc(mg/dL) SI
concentration (umol/L) URO Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc(mg/dL) SI concentration (umol/L) PH BLD Measurement value
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc(mg/dL) SI
Concentration(mg/L) KET Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc(mg/dL) SI Concentration(mmol/L) NIT LEU Semiquantitative sign
Semiquantitative sign Concentration(Leu/uL) CRE P/C Conventional
Conc(mg/dL) SI Conventional(g/L) Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Con(mg/gCr) SI Concentration(mg/g) 10 0.1 25 50 0.5 500 OVER OVER
2+ OVER OVER 1+ 5.0 NORMAL 2 +30 1.7 +10 0.1 1+ 0.5 8.5 1+ 2.0 34
5.5 +0.03 0.3 +3 +50 2.8 +20 0.2 1+ 1.0 17 1+ 3.0 50 6.0 1+ 0.06
0.6 1+ 10 1.0 2+ 4 1+ 70 3.9 +1 30 0.3 2+ 2.0 34 2+ 4.0 70 6.5 1+
0.10 1.0 1+ 20 2.0 5 1+ 100 5.6 1+ 50 0.5 2+ 3.0 50 2+ 6.0 100 7.0
2+ 0.20 2.0 2+ 40 4.0 6 2+ 150 8.3 1+ 70 0.7 2+ 4.0 70 3+ 8.0 140
7.5 2+ 0.50 5.0 2+ 60 6.0 7 2+ 200 11 2+ 100 1.0 3+ 6.0 100 3+ 12.0
200 8.0 3+ 1.00 10.0 3+ 80 8.0 8 3+ 300 17 2+ 200 2.0 3+ 8.0 140 4+
OVER OVER 8.5 3+ OVER OVER 3+ 100 10.0 4+ 150 15.0 4+ OVER OVER 9.0
9 3+ 500 28 3+ 300 3.0 3+ 10.0 170 10 4+ 1000 56 3+ 600 6.0 4+ OVER
OVER 11 +4 OVER OVER 4+ OVER OVER

DILUTE NORMAL

The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks
are not marked with them). Results for CRE and P/C are obtained
only when [J AX4280 mg] is selected. DILUTE of P/C is indicated
with an exclamation mark (!).

Rev. A

3-12

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

AX-4280 [J AX4280 mg] [W AX4280 mg] [W AX4280 SI] [I AX4280 mg]1
GLU Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI
Concentration(mmol/l) PRO Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc.(mg/dl) SI Concentration(g/L) BIL Semiquantitative sign
Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI Concentration(umol/l) URO
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI
Concentration(umol/l) PH BLD Measurement value Semiquantitative
sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI Concentration(mg/l) KET
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI
Concentration(mmol/l) NIT LEU Semiquantitative sign
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(Leu/ul) CRE P/C
Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI Conventional(g/L) Semiquantitative
sign Conventional Con(mg/gCr) 10 0.1 DILUTE NEG. 25 50 0.5 NORMA L
500 OVER OVER +2 OVER +1 5.0 NORM AL NORM AL 2 +30 1.7 +10 0.1 +1
0.5 8.5 +1 2 34 5.5 +0.03 0.3 +3 +50 2.8 +20 0.2 +1 1 17 +1 3 50
6.0 +1 0.06 0.6 +1 10 1 +2 4 +1 70 3.9 +1 30 0.3 +2 2 34 +2 4 70
6.5 +1 0.1 1.0 +1 20 2 5 +1 100 5.6 +1 50 0.5 +2 3 50 +2 6 100 7.0
+2 0.2 2.0 +2 40 4 6 +2 150 8.3 +1 70 0.7 +2 4 70 +3 8 140 7.5 +2
0.5 5.0 +2 60 6 7 +2 200 11 +2 100 1.0 +3 6 100 +3 12 200 8.0 +3
1.0 10.0 +3 80 8 8 +3 300 17 +2 200 2.0 +3 8 140 +4 OVER OVER 8.5
+3 OVER OVER +3 100 10 +4 150 15 +4 OVER OVER 9.0 9 +3 500 28 +3
300 3.0 +3 10 170 10 +4 1000 56 +3 600 6.0 +4 OVER OVER 11 +4 OVER
OVER +4 OVER OVER

The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks
are not marked with them). Results for CRE and P/C are obtained
only when [J AX4280 mg] is selected. DILUTE of P/C is indicated
with an exclamation mark (!).

SA-4230 [J SA4230 mg]1 GLU PRO BIL URO Semiquantitative sign
Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc.(mg/dl) Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl)
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) PH BLD KET NIT LEU
Measurement value Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl)
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) Semiquantitative
sign Semiquantitative sign 5.0 NORMA L 2.0 5.5 +0.03 +1 10 +1 +3.0
6.0 +1 0.06 +1 20 +2 +1 +2 +3 4.0 6.5 +1 0.10 +2 40 6.0 7.0 +2 0.20
+2 60 8.0 7.5 +2 0.50 +3 80 12.0 8.0 +3 1.00 +3 100 OVER 8.5 +3
OVER +4 150 +4 OVER 9.0 2 +30 +10 +1 0.5 +1 3 +50 +20 +1 1.0 +1 4
+1 70 +1 30 +2 2.0 +2 5 +1 100 +1 50 +2 3.0 +2 6 +2 150 +1 70 +2
4.0 +3 7 +2 200 +2 100 +3 6.0 +3 8 +3 300 +2 200 +3 8.0 +4 9 +3 500
+3 300 +3 10.0 10 +4 1000 +3 600 +4 OVER 11 +4 OVER +4 OVER

The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks
are not marked with them). 3-13

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

SA-4220 Uriflet S Specifications [J SA4220S mg]1 GLU PRO BIL URO
PH BLD KET NIT LEU Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl)
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) Semiquantitative
sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc.(mg/dl) Measurement value Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc.(mg/dl) Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl)
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.( /ul) +1 25 5.0 +2 +30 +10
+1 0.5 +1 2.0 5.5 +0.03 +3 +50 +20 +1 1.0 +1 3.0 6.0 +1 0.06 +1 10
+2 75 250 500 4 +1 70 +1 30 +2 2.0 +2 4.0 6.5 +1 0.10 +1 20 5 +1
100 +1 50 +2 3.0 +2 6.0 7.0 +2 0.20 +2 30 6 +2 150 +1 70 +2 4.0 +3
8.0 7.5 +2 0.50 +2 45 7 +2 200 +2 100 +3 6.0 +3 12.0 8.0 +3 1.00 +3
60 8 +3 300 +2 200 +3 8.0 +4 ^^^^ 8.5 +3 ^^^^ +3 80 +4 ^^^^ 9.0 9
+3 500 +3 300 +3 10.0 10 +4 1000 +3 400 +4 ^^^^ 11 +4 ^^^^ +4
^^^^

The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks
are not marked with them).

SA-4220 Uriflet A Specifications [M SA4220A mg] [M SA4220A SI]1
GLU Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI
Concentration(mmol/l) PRO Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc.(mg/dl) SI Concentration(g/l) BIL Semiquantitative sign
Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI Concentration(umol/l) URO
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI
Concentration(umol/l) PH BLD Measurement value Semiquantitative
sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI Concentration(mg/l) KET
Semiquantitative sign Conventional Conc.(mg/dl) SI
Concentration(mmol/l) NIT LEU Semiquantitative sign Conventional
Conc.( /ul) 0 0.0 0 0.00 0.0 0.0 +0.2 3.4 4.5 0.00 0.0 0 0.0 2 10
0.6 5 0.05 +0.2 3.4 +1.0 17.0 5.0 +0.03 0.3 +5 0.5 +1 25 3 +30 1.7
+10 0.10 +1 0.5 8.5 +1 2.0 34.0 5.5 +1 0.06 0.6 +1 10 1.0 +2 75 250
500 4 +50 2.8 +20 0.20 +1 1.0 17.0 +1 3.0 50.0 6.0 +1 0.10 1.0 +1
20 2.0 5 +1 70 3.9 +1 30 0.30 +2 2.0 34.0 +2 4.0 70.0 6.5 +2 0.20
2.0 +2 30 3.0 6 +1 100 5.6 +1 50 0.50 +2 4.0 70.0 +2 6.0 100.0 7.0
+2 0.50 5.0 +2 45 4.5 7 +2 150 8.3 +1 70 0.70 +3 6.0 100.0 +3 8.0
140.0 7.5 +3 1.00 10.0 +3 60 6.0 8 +2 200 11.0 +2 100 1.00 +3 10.0
170.0 +3 12.0 200.0 8.0 +3 ^^^^ ^^^^ +3 80 8.0 +4 ^^^^ ^^^^ 9 +3
300 17.0 +2 150 1.50 +4 ^^^^ ^^^^ +4 ^^^^ ^^^^ 8.5 9.0 10 +3 500
28.0 +2 200 2.00 11 +4 1000 56.0 +3 250 2.50 12 +4 ^^^^ ^^^^ +3 300
3.00 +3 400 4.00 +4 ^^^^ ^^^^ 13 14

The shaded ranks are indicated with abnormal marks (the PH ranks
are not marked with them).

3-14

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

3.1.7. Strip itemSelect Strip item to change the settings for
the calibration curves.

3.1.7.1. Calibration curveCalibration curve is for changing the
calibration curve for each measurement item. A special password is
required to make changes to the settings, but it is not described
here. This option is not displayed in the normal service mode that
is accessible by entering the password -4030-.

3.1.7.2. Measurement unitSelect Measurement unit to change the
unit of results for each measurement item. The instructions are
described below. 1. Select the measurement item for which to change
the unit of results. 2. Type in the character string of the desired
unit.

3.1.7.3. Correction coefficientSelect Correction coefficient to
set the primary reflective correction coefficients (A and B) for
each measurement item. Measurement results are corrected according
to the formula y = Ax + B. The setting instructions are described
below. 1. Select the measurement item for which to change the
primary reflective correction coefficients. 2. Type in the primary
reflective correction coefficients. INIT CAL A Sets the primary
reflective correction coefficient A. The range is as follows. 0.900
to 1.100 [Default: 1.000] INIT CAL B Sets the primary reflective
correction coefficient B. The range is as follows. -9.9 to 9.9
[Default: 0.0] [TIP] For P/C, one-hundredths of the set coefficient
is used in the calculation. e.g.) When the entry is 5.6, the result
for P/C is calculated using the coefficient 0.056.

3.1.7.4. Exception judgmentSelect Exception judgment to change
the exceptional judgment value for each measurement item. This
value determines the result of the measurement item under an
exceptional condition. For example, the P/C results can be
exceptionally judged under the condition, the result is DILUTE if
the PRO reflectivity is larger than 68% and the CRE reflectivity is
smaller than 23%. These two values can be set here. The
instructions are described below. However, no changes can be made
to this parameter now because we have not defined how this
parameter should be used and reserve it for future use. 1. Select
the measurement item for which to change the exceptional judgment
value. 2. Type in the exceptional judgment value. PAR-A Sets the
exceptional judgment value A. The range is as follows. 0.0 to 99.9
[Default: 1.000] PAR-B Sets the exceptional judgment value B. The
range is as follows. 0.0 to 99.9 [Default:1.000] PAR-C Sets the
exceptional judgment value C. The range is as follows. 0.0 to 99.9
[Default: 1.000]

3.1.7.5. Item nameSelect Item name to rename the measurement
items. The instructions are described below. 1. Select a
measurement item to rename. 2. Type in the character string of the
new name.

3-15

Chapter-3 Operation of Service mode

AX-4030 Service Manual

3.1.8. Control IDSelect Control ID to make the settings related
to control IDs. [TIP] To have the control IDs successfully
identified, the controls must be set in the normal racks or the
item racks with no specific test strips specified. Use of other
racks ignores the control IDs, therefore the controls are measured
as normal measurement samples. USE Specify whether to identify the
controls by barcode IDs. OFF: Does not identify the controls by
barcode IDs. [Default] ON: Identifies the controls by barcode IDs.
Start digit Specify from which digit of the read barcode ID the
instrument should verify. How the reading i

AX-4030
3
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Premise
This operating manual contains important information on the functions of the AUTION 
MAX™ AX-4030.
This operating manual is issued by ARKRAY, Inc.
Read carefully prior to starting up the unit.
This instrument is IVD medical device.
This product conforms to European Directive 98/79/EC.





4
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

Introduction
Read this operating manual thoroughly before using the instrument. This operating manual gives 
an outline of the instrument and the proper procedures for operation and maintenance. Follow the 
instructions in this operating manual in order not to impair the protection by the instrument. 
Also, keep this operating manual in an easily accessible place near the instrument.
■  TAKE THE UTMOST CARE WHEN HANDLING URINE. This instrument 
uses urine as sample and an ingredient of control solutions. Urine may be 
contaminated by pathogenic microbes that can cause infectious diseases. 
Improper handling of urine may cause infection to the user or other 
individuals by pathogenic microbes.
■  This instrument is to be operated by qualified persons only. A qualified 
person is one having adequate knowledge of clinical testing and the 
disposal of infectious waste. Thoroughly read this operating manual before 
use.
■  Never touch the aspirating nozzle, waste box, waste box tray, trap bottle, 
drain bottle, drain tubes, transport tray, introduction tray, or other parts 
where the sample may adhere with unprotected hands. During cleaning or 
maintenance of these parts, wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to 
pathogenic microbes.
■  Discard used samples, test strips, liquid waste, parts, and instrument in 
accordance with local regulations for biohazardous waste.
© 2008 ARKRAY, Inc.
•  It is strictly prohibited to copy any part of this operating manual without the expressed consent of 
ARKRAY, Inc.
• The information in this operating manual is subject to change without notice.
•  ARKRAY, Inc. has made every effort to prepare this operating manual as best possible. Should 
you discover anything strange, incorrect or missing, contact your distributor.





AX-4030
5
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Symbols
The following symbols are used in this operating manual and labels on this instrument to call your 
attention to specific items.
For Your Safety
   Follow the instructions given here to prevent exposure to pathogenic 
microbes.
  Follow the instructions given here to prevent injury and property damage.
For Optimal Performance
IMPORTANT: Follow the instructions given here to obtain accurate measurement results.
NOTE: Information useful for preventing damage to the instrument or parts, and other important 
information you should keep in mind.
REFERENCE: Additional explanations that help you make the best use of the instrument, and 
information on related functions.





6
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
Caution Labels
This instrument has several caution labels on the areas that have potential dangers. Please learn 
potential dangers warned by each label and observe the precautions described below.
■ Front
1. Sample aspirating section
   The tip of the nozzle descends from here to aspirate samples. To avoid 
injury, keep your hands away from here while the power is on. Also, 
avoid touching the sample racks in the sampler while measurement is in 
progress. Contact with moving sample racks may result in injury.
2. Front panel
   The nozzle, washing bath, and other components inside this instrument 
can be contaminated by urine samples. Do not touch these parts with 
unprotected hands. Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to 
pathogenic microbes while cleaning these parts.
3. Trap bottle and tube
   Do not touch liquid waste with unprotected hands to prevent exposure to 
pathogenic microbes.
4. Maintenance section
   The introduction tray, tubes and other components inside this section 
can be contaminated by urine samples. Do not touch these parts with 
unprotected hands. Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to 
pathogenic microbes while cleaning these parts.
5. Feeders
   The test strip storage section of the feeder may move during measurement. 
To avoid injury, do not touch inside the storage section when adding new 
test strips to the feeder. Press the standby switch to turn off the power 
before cleaning the test strip storage section.

3
5
4
1
2





AX-4030
7
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
■ Rear
1. Drain joint
   Liquid waste is discharged from this joint to the drain bottle. Do not touch 
liquid waste with unprotected hands because the drainage contains urine 
samples. When cleaning the drain joint, tube and bottle, wear protective 
gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
2. Washing solution joint
   The washing solution in the washing solution bottle goes through this 
joint. Use the specified washing solution.
3. Power input terminal
   The supplied power cord is plugged in here. Use of other cords may cause 
electric shock or fire. The fuse holders are also located here. Prepare fuses 
of the specified capacity for replacement.
4. Waste box and waste box tray
   Used test strips are collected in this box. When discarding the test strips, 
wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.

1
2
3
4





8
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
E
■ Inside
1. Transport tray
   The transport tray can be contaminated by urine samples. Do not touch 
this tray with unprotected hands. Wear protective gloves to prevent 
exposure to pathogenic microbes while cleaning these parts.
2. Introduction tray
   The introduction tray can be contaminated by urine samples. Do not 
touch this tray with unprotected hands. Wear protective gloves to prevent 
exposure to pathogenic microbes while cleaning these parts.
3. Test strip storage section
   Contact with the electrical circuits can damage the instrument. Do not 
touch the electrical circuits.

1
2
1. Transport tray 
2. Introduction tray 
3





AX-4030
9
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
■ Drain Bottle
1. Drain Bottle
   Liquid waste is collected in this bottle. When discarding liquid waste, wear 
protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
■ Washing solution bottle
1. Washing solution bottle
 
Fill this bottle with the washing solution prepared as specified.

1

1





10
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
G

Table of Contents
Premise .......................................................................... 3
Introduction ..................................................................... 4
Symbols .......................................................................... 5
Caution Labels................................................................ 6
Table of Contents ......................................................... 10
Chapter 1  Before Use
1.1  Outline of the AX-4030 ....................................... 1-2
1.1.1  What You Can Do with the AX-4030 ................ 1-2
1.1.2  Features ........................................................... 1-3
1.1.3  Specifications  .................................................. 1-5
1.1.4  Measurement Principle .................................... 1-6
1.1.5  Rank Table ..................................................... 1-11
1.2  Unpacking ......................................................... 1-13
1.2.1  Instrument ...................................................... 1-13
1.2.2  Sampler .......................................................... 1-13
1.2.3  Accessories .................................................... 1-14
1.2.4  Accessory Case ............................................. 1-15
1.3  Components ...................................................... 1-16
1.3.1  Front View ...................................................... 1-16
1.3.2  Rear View ....................................................... 1-17
1.4  Installation......................................................... 1-18
1.4.1  Precautions in Instrument Installation ............ 1-18
1.4.2  Unlocking the Instrument ............................... 1-20
1.4.3  Attaching the Sampler .................................... 1-23
1.4.4  Installing the Washing Solution Bottle ............ 1-26
1.4.5  Installing the Drain Bottle ............................... 1-28
1.4.6  Installing the Waste Box ................................. 1-29
1.4.7  Connecting the Power Cord and  
  External Devices ............................................ 1-30
1.5  Starting Up ........................................................ 1-31
1.5.1  Turning On the Power for the First Time ........ 1-31
1.5.2  Setting up the Printer and System Clock ....... 1-33
1.5.3  Turning Off the Power .................................... 1-34
1.6  Relocation ......................................................... 1-35
1.6.1  Precautions in Instrument Relocation ............ 1-35
1.6.2  Checking for Leftover Test Strips ................... 1-35
1.6.3  Discharging the Washing Solution ................. 1-36
1.6.4  Unplugging the Power Cord ........................... 1-36
1.6.5  Disconnecting the Tubes,  
  Sensor Code, and Cables .............................. 1-37
1.6.6  Detaching the Sampler ................................... 1-38
1.6.7  Relocating the Instrument .............................. 1-39
1.7  Basic Operations ..............................................1-40
1.7.1  Components on the Operator Panel .............. 1-40
1.7.2  Screen Configuration ..................................... 1-41
1.7.3  Menu Operations and Examples .................... 1-42
Chapter 2  Measurement
2.1  Before Making Measurements........................... 2-2
2.1.1  Flowchart of Operational Procedure ................ 2-2
2.1.2  Measurement and Calibration .......................... 2-3
2.1.3  Measurement Terminology .............................. 2-4
2.1.4  Sample Containers and Sample Racks ........... 2-7
2.2  Measurement Precautions ................................. 2-9
2.2.1  Handling the Instrument ................................... 2-9
2.2.2  Handling Samples .......................................... 2-10
2.2.3  Handling Test Strips ....................................... 2-11
2.3  Preparation for Measurement.......................... 2-12
2.3.1  Checking Wastes and Consumables ............. 2-12
2.3.2  Turning on the Power ..................................... 2-14
2.3.3  Loading Test Strips into the Feeders ............. 2-16
2.3.4  Assigning the Type of Test Strips  
  to the Item Racks ........................................... 2-19
2.3.5  Preparing Samples ......................................... 2-21
2.4  Measurement Operations ................................ 2-23
2.4.1  Normal Measurement:  
  Measuring Samples Continuously .................. 2-23
2.4.2  Port STAT Measurement:  
  Measuring a Higher Priority Sample .............. 2-27
2.4.3  Rack STAT Measurement:  
  Measuring Higher Priority Samples ................ 2-31
2.5  S.G. Calibration................................................. 2-34
2.5.1  Preparing S.G. Standard Solutions ................ 2-34
2.5.2  Starting S.G. Calibration ................................ 2-36
2.6  Control Measurement....................................... 2-38
2.7  Check Measurement......................................... 2-43
2.8  Displayed and Printed Reports ....................... 2-49
2.8.1  Displayed Results Report ............................... 2-49
2.8.2  Printed Results Report ................................... 2-50
2.8.3  Abnormal Results List .................................... 2-54





AX-4030
11
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
G
2.8.4  Error and Trouble List (Automatic Report)  .... 2-54
2.8.5  Trouble List (Manual Report)  ........................ 2-55
2.8.6  Check Measurement Result Report ............... 2-56
2.8.7  List of Current Parameter Settings ................. 2-57
Chapter 3  Auxiliary Operations
3.1  Menu Configuration ............................................ 3-2
3.2  [Parameter settings] Menu ................................ 3-4
3.2.1  Assigning the Type of Test Strips  
  to the Item Racks ............................................. 3-4
3.2.2  Using a Different Results Format ..................... 3-4
3.2.3  Configuring the Measurement  
  Numbering Method ........................................... 3-6
3.3  [Results] Menu .................................................... 3-8
3.3.1  Printing/Transmitting Results ........................... 3-8
3.3.2  Reviewing Results/Editing IDs ....................... 3-12
3.3.3  Deleting Results and Trouble Logs  
  from Memory .................................................. 3-15
3.4  [Initial settings] Menu ....................................... 3-17
3.4.1  Setting the System Clock ............................... 3-17
3.4.2  Enabling/Disabling the Built-in Printer ............ 3-18
3.4.3  Enabling/Disabling the External Output ......... 3-20
3.4.4  Controlling the Beeper Volume ...................... 3-21
3.5  [Print] Menu ....................................................... 3-23
3.5.1  Printing a Trouble List .................................... 3-23
3.5.2  Printing the Abnormal Results List ................. 3-24
3.5.3  Printing the Current Parameter Settings ........ 3-25
3.6  [Maintenance] Menu .........................................3-27
3.6.1  Viewing Maintenance Information .................. 3-27
Chapter 4  Maintenance
4.1  Frequency of Maintenance ................................ 4-2
4.2  Daily Maintenance .............................................. 4-3
4.2.1  Cleaning the Waste Box ................................... 4-3
4.2.2  Discarding Liquid Waste from  
  the Drain Bottle ................................................ 4-5
4.2.3  Cleaning the Feeders ....................................... 4-6
4.2.4  Cleaning the Test Strip Stopper ....................... 4-8
4.2.5  Washing the Introduction Tray ....................... 4-12
4.3  Replacement of Consumables ........................ 4-15
4.3.1  Replacing the Washing Solution .................... 4-15
4.3.2  Replacing the Thermal Printer Paper ............. 4-17
4.4  Regular Maintenance ....................................... 4-18
4.4.1  Washing the Air Filter ..................................... 4-18
4.4.2  Washing the Transport Tray ........................... 4-19
4.4.3  Cleaning the S.G. Cell .................................... 4-24
4.4.4  Cleaning the Washing Bath ............................ 4-26
4.4.5  Replacing the Washing Solution Filter ........... 4-29
4.4.6  Replacing the Drain Pinch Valve Tubes ......... 4-30
4.4.7  Replacing the White Plate .............................. 4-32
4.5  Before/After Long Periods of Disuse.............. 4-34
4.5.1  Preparing the Instrument Before 
 
  Long Periods of Disuse .................................. 4-34
4.5.2  Starting the Instrument Up  
  After Long Periods of Disuse ......................... 4-37
Chapter 5  Troubleshooting
5.1  When a Warning Occurs ....................................5-2
5.1.1  From Warning Generation to Remedy ............. 5-2
5.1.2  Causes and Remedies ..................................... 5-3
  W001 – W003 ............................................. 5-3
  W004 – W009 ............................................. 5-4
  W010 – W011 ............................................. 5-5
5.2  When an Error Occurs ....................................... 5-6
5.2.1  From Error Generation to Remedy ................... 5-6
5.2.2  Causes and Remedies ..................................... 5-7
  E101 – E104 ............................................... 5-7
  E110 – E120 ............................................... 5-8
  E130 – E140 ............................................... 5-9
5.3  When Trouble Occurs ...................................... 5-10
5.3.1  From Trouble Generation to Remedy ............ 5-10
5.3.2  Causes and Remedies ................................... 5-11
  T999, T201 – T203 ...................................5-11
  T210 – T220 ............................................. 5-12
  T221 – T222 ............................................. 5-13
  T223 – T240 ............................................. 5-14
  T241 – T261 ............................................. 5-15
  T270 – T290 ............................................. 5-16





12
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
G
5.4  Measurement-Related Messages ....................5-17
5.4.1  Results-Related Errors (Printed Results  
  Reports: on the lowest line) ............................ 5-17
  No sample ................................................ 5-17
  Skipped..................................................... 5-17
  Reflection light intensity drift ..................... 5-17
  Excess reflectivity .....................................5-18
  Test strip out-of-position ...........................5-18
  Abnormal sampling ................................... 5-18
5.4.2  S.G. Measurement-Related Errors  
  (Printed Results Report: S.G.)  ...................... 5-19
  UNDER ..................................................... 5-19
  OVER ....................................................... 5-19
  --------- ....................................................... 5-19
  CAL. ERR .................................................5-19
5.4.3  Turbidity Measurement-Related Errors  
  (Printed Results Report: TURB)  .................... 5-20
  CAL. ERR .................................................5-20
  ERROR
..................................................... 5-20
5.4.4  Messages on the Abnormal Results List ........ 5-20
  Barcode misread ...................................... 5-20
  No sample ................................................ 5-20
  Measurement error ...................................5-21
  Abnormal data .......................................... 5-21
  Positive sample ........................................ 5-21
  S.G. measurement error ........................... 5-21
  Turbidity measurement error .................... 5-21
5.5  If This Happens ................................................. 5-22
5.5.1  If the Instrument Does Not Start Up  
  (Replacing Fuses)  ......................................... 5-22





AX-4030
1-1
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
G
Before Use
1.1  Outline of the AX-4030 .............................................1-2
  1.1.1  What You Can Do with the AX-4030 ..........
1-2
  1.1.2  Features ......................................................1-3
  1.1.3  Specifications  .............................................
1-5
  1.1.4  Measurement Principle ...............................
1-6
  1.1.5  Rank Table ...............................................
1-11
1.2  Unpacking ...............................................................1-13
  1.2.1  Instrument .................................................1-13
  1.2.2  Sampler ....................................................1-13
  1.2.3  Accessories ..............................................1-14
  1.2.4  Accessory Case ........................................
1-15
1.3  Components ............................................................1-16
  1.3.1  Front View .................................................
1-16
  1.3.2  Rear View .................................................
1-17
1.4  Installation...............................................................1-18
  1.4.1  Precautions in Instrument Installation .......
1-18
  1.4.2  Unlocking the Instrument ..........................
1-20
  1.4.3  Attaching the Sampler ..............................
1-23
  1.4.4  Installing the Washing Solution Bottle ......
1-26
  1.4.5  Installing the Drain Bottle ..........................
1-28
  1.4.6  Installing the Waste Box ...........................
1-29
  1.4.7  Connecting the Power Cord and 
 
      External Devices
............................1-30
1.5  Starting Up ..............................................................1-31
  1.5.1  Turning On the Power for the First Time ..
1-31
  1.5.2  Setting up the Printer and System Clock ..
1-33
  1.5.3  Turning Off the Power ...............................
1-34
1.6  Relocation ...............................................................1-35
  1.6.1  Precautions in Instrument Relocation .......
1-35
  1.6.2  Checking for Leftover Test Strips .............
1-35
  1.6.3  Discharging the Washing Solution ............
1-36
  1.6.4  Unplugging the Power Cord ......................
1-36
  1.6.5  Disconnecting the Tubes, 
 
    Sensor Code, and Cables .........................
1-37
  1.6.6  Detaching the Sampler .............................
1-38
  1.6.7  Relocating the Instrument .........................
1-39
1.7  Basic Operations ....................................................1-40
  1.7.1  Components on the Operator Panel .........
1-40
  1.7.2  Screen Configuration ................................
1-41
  1.7.3  Menu Operations and Examples ..............
1-42
Chapter
1





1-2
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
Outline of the AX-40301.1
  1.1.1    What You Can Do with the AX-4030
Measurement Items
The AX-4030 uses test strips to analyze urine samples fully automatically. Comprehensive 
assessments can be made based on color-tone and turbidity measurements, abnormal coloration 
detection, S.G. (specific gravity) measurement, as well as ten qualitative analyses of GLU 
(glucose), PRO (protein), BIL (bilirubin), PH (pH), BLD (blood), URO (urobilinogen), KET 
(ketones), NIT (nitrite) and LEU (leukocytes).
Measurement Method
AX-4030 performs the following measurements.
■ Normal measurement
Normal measurement continuously measures a number of samples loaded in the sample racks. 
A sample rack can contain up to 10 samples. Place the sample racks with samples in the sampler 
and press the start key. The instrument then automatically transports the sample racks, aspirates 
the samples in order, and obtains the results. Up to 5 sample racks (50 samples) can be loaded 
into the sampler for one-way transportation, and up to 10 sample racks (100 samples) for loop 
transportation.
*  The instrument is factory-set to the one-way transportation mode. If you prefer loop transportation to measure more 
samples at a time, contact your distributor.
■ STAT measurement
STAT measurement is used to interrupt ongoing normal measurements and measure one or more 
urgent samples. There are two types of STAT measurements: 
  Port STAT measurement:   Measures a single sample loaded into the STAT port. If you have 
a sample to test urgently, you can load the sample into the STAT 
port to interrupt normal measurements in progress.
  Rack STAT measurement:   Interrupts normal measurements in progress to measure up to 7 
samples loaded into the STAT and control rack. 
■ Control measurement
The specified controls should be measured at regular intervals for the quality control of the 
instrument. Use the STAT and control rack to load the controls. Up to 3 types (or 3 concentrations) 
of controls can be used at a time.
■ Check measurement
If obtained measurement results seem inaccurate, perform a check measurement using the supplied 
check strips to check if the instrument is working correctly.





AX-4030
1-3
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.1.2    Features
■ Easy to operate 
Daily measurements are done in three easy steps: 1) load the test strips, 2) load the samples, and 
3) press the start key. After pressing the start key, the instrument automatically performs the 
entire series of operations to effectuate measurement: test strip picking, sample transport, sample 
aspiration, test strip staining, measurement, and test strip disposal. 
■ Test strip staining
After aspirating sample with a nozzle, the instrument stains each reagent pad on the test strip with 
a small quantity of sample. Measurements can be performed as long as there is at least 2 mL of 
sample in the sample tube.
■ Dual test strip feeders for multiple test strips
The instrument has two feeders, therefore two types of test strips can be loaded in the instrument 
at all times. When using the supplied item racks, test strips can be automatically picked from 
the feeder assigned to the item racks so as to expedite measurement. This reduces the hassles of 
changing test strips in/out and makes measurement work more efficient.
■ Large color LCD
A large color LCD makes measurement conditions and menu settings easy to read and identify, 
which facilitates operation. If a warning occurs such as test strips or solution running out, remedial 
action is displayed in English so that the situation can be quickly corrected.
■ Thermal compensation function
The best temperature range for measurements is 20 - 25°C, but some measurement items may not 
yield correct results if visually evaluated outside of this range. The thermal compensation feature of 
this instrument has an advantage over human visual evaluation in that it minimizes errors caused by 
temperature changes within a 10 - 30°C range to deliver correct measurement results.
■ General diagnostics support
Samples are measured according to color, turbidity and abnormal coloration detection. These 
capabilities eliminate the need for visual evaluation and provide useful information for basing 
evaluations on printed results.
  Color-tone measurement
   The instrument examines the color of the sample by measuring contrast and hue. It evaluates 
samples against 23 colors (see page 1-9).
  Turbidity measurement
   The instrument measures turbidity and evaluates samples as “clear”, “turbid” or “dense 
turbid”.





1-4
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  Abnormal coloration detection
   The instrument automatically detects false positive reactions of reagent pads caused by drug-
administered urine and notifies you by adding a “!” to printed measurement results.
■ Memory capacity for measurement results of 2,500 samples
Measurement results for a total of 2,500 samples, between normal measurements and STAT 
measurements, can be stored in memory. These results can be displayed, printed and sent to 
an external device as necessary. As new data is recorded above 2,500 samples, the old data is 
sequentially deleted. Up to 200 control measurements, 50 check measurements and 100 troubles 
can be logged.
■ Management by barcode
Measurement results can be managed by ID using a barcode reader. If a barcode label is affixed 
to the sample tube, the barcode is read during measurement and assigned to the measurement 
results as an ID. A built-in barcode reader is included with the instrument as part of the standard 
equipment, while a hand-held barcode reader is optionally available.
■ Two-way/one-way online communications
The instrument can be connected to an external device for two-way or one-way communications. It 
can operate as a component in an online network configuration.





AX-4030
1-5
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  1.1.3    Specifications
Specifications
Product AUTION MAX AX-4030
Configuration Instrument, sampler, and accessories
Sample Urine
Reagent AUTION Sticks 9EB
Instrument specifications
Measurement items GLU (Glucose), PRO (Protein), BIL (Bilirubin), URO (Urobilinogen), PH (pH), BLD (Blood), 
KET (Ketones), NIT (Nitrite), LEU (Leukocytes), S.G. (Specific gravity), turbidity, 
and color tone
Measurement range Test strip:  For rank table, see page 1-11.
S.G.:  1.000 to 1.050 (Resolution: 0.001)
Color tone:  For color classification diagram, see page 1-9.
Turbidity:  Three levels including “clear”, “turbid”, and “excessively turbid”
Measurement method Test strip:  Dual-wavelength reflectance measurement (Single wavelength for BLD)
S.G.:  Reflection refractometry
Color tone:  Light-transmission measurement
Turbidity:  Light-scattering measurement
Measurement wavelength 5 LED wavelengths (430, 500, 565, 635, 760 nm)
Sample supply Sampler
Test strip reaction About 60 seconds
Test strip storage Two test strip storage compartments, each of which can contain different test strips
Test strip storage capacity Max. 200 test strips × two storage compartments
Processing speed 225 samples/hour
Sample consumption 0.90 mL
Required sample volume Min. 2.0 mL
Sample container Use the sample tubes that comply with the standards illustrated in “Sample Containers” in 
“2.1.4 Sample Containers and Sample Racks” on page 2-7.
Applicable racks ARKRAY racks
Sample loading capacity One-way transportation (default): Max. 50 samples, Loop transportation: Max. 100 samples
Warm-up time Max. 2 minutes
Display Large color liquid crystal display (320 × 240 dots)
Built-in printer 58-mm width thermal printer paper (24 digits)
Memory capacity Normal and STAT measurement:  2500 tests
Control measurement:  200 tests
Check measurement:  50 tests
Trouble list:  100 tests
External output 2 ports (One of these ports can be optionally used as an Ethernet port.)
Communication system RS-232C compliant (Switchable between one-way and two-way)
Transmission speed RS-232C:  Selectable from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps
Ethernet:  10BASE-T
Thermal compensation Supported
Operating environment Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 20 - 80% RH (Non-condensing)
Measurement environment Temperature: 10 - 30°C; Humidity: 30 - 60% RH (Non-condensing)
Storage environment Temperature: 1 - 30°C; Humidity: 20 - 80% RH (Non-condensing)
Environment during transport Temperature: -13 - 43°C; Humidity: 20 - 80% RH (Non-condensing)
Dimensions 530 (W) × 530 (D) × 530 (H) mm
Weight Instrument: approx. 37 kg; Sampler: approx. 4 kg
Supply voltage (Instrument) 100 - 240 V AC (Max. power line fluctuation of ±10%), 50/60 Hz
Power input Max. 150 VA
Sound pressure level Less than 85 dB
Site location For indoor use only
Altitude 2000 m
Pollution degree 2
Over voltage category
II
Expected life 5 years (According to company data)





1-6
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  1.1.4    Measurement Principle
This instrument measures purpose-specific test strips by dual-wavelength reflectance measurement 
(single wavelength for BLD) and urine specific gravity (S.G.) by reflection refractometry. 
This section explains the principles for measuring “test strips”, “specific gravity”, “color”, and 
“turbidity”.
Test Strip Measurement
Test strips loaded in the feeder are sent one at a time to the tray inside the instrument and carried 
to the sample staining position by the introduction arm. At the sample staining position, the 
nozzle that aspirated the sample from the sample tube in the sampler stains each reagent pad (each 
measurement item) of the test strip. Once stained, the test strip is transported to the optical block. 
Within about 60 sec of staining, the test strip reacts and changes color, therefore its reflectivity is 
measured in that moment. When measurement has been completed, the test strip is discarded in the 
waste box.
The measurement unit irradiates the reagent pad with light of 2 wavelengths from a 5-wavelength 
LED, the reflected light of which is picked up by a single detector.* Moreover, by measuring the 
reflectivity of the color correction pad of the test strip, destabilizing factors such as the amount of 
reflected light and colored samples are corrected.
* The irradiated wavelength combinations differ according to measurement item.
Wavelengths by measurement item
Measurement item GLU PRO BIL URO PH BLD KET NIT LEU
Measurement 
wavelength (nm)
635 635 565 565 635 635 565 565 565
Reference 
wavelength (nm)
760 760 760 760 760 – 760 760 760
Reflectivity is measured with the formula below.
  R = (Tm • Cs) / (Ts • Cm)
    R:  Reflectivity
    Tm:  Amount of reflected light coming from reagent pad at measurement wavelength
    Ts:  Amount of reflected light coming from reagent pad at reference wavelength
    Cm:   Amount of reflected light coming from color correction pad at measurement 
wavelength
    Cs:   Amount of reflected light coming from color correction pad at reference 
wavelength
However, BLD is measured with only one wavelength and calculated with the formula below.
  R = Tm / Cm





AX-4030
1-7
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
F
These reflectivities “R” are compared against calibration curves stored in the instrument and 
output as measurement results. Also, temperature is corrected to eliminate changes caused by 
environmental temperature.
Specific Gravity (S.G.) Measurement
Specific gravity of a urine sample is obtained by measuring the refraction of the sample using a 
prism and subjecting results to a calculation formula (reflection refractometry). The light from an 
LED passes through the prism and is reflected on the prism face contacting the sample. The light 
reflected off the prism is collimated into a thin beam by passing through a slit and directed to a 
detector (CCD image sensor). At this point, the refractive index at the interface between the prism 
face and sample will change according to the specific gravity, therefore the position of the incident 
light from the slit will change. The refractive index is obtained by detecting the position of the 
incident light and, after correcting it for temperature effects, it is converted into a Brix value. The 
specific gravity of the sample is then obtained using this Brix value and a conversion formula. 
The Brix value is the sugar content of an aqueous solution measured at 20°C and represents the 
strength of the solution as percentage by weight.
For example, the Brix value is 30% for a 30% sucrose solution (30 g of sucrose sugar and 70 g of 
water in a 100 g solution).
Specific gravity is calculated as follows:
1. The specific gravity of the sample is calculated.
  SGx´ = 1 + (4/900) 
*
 Brix value 
  (However, specific gravity is equal to 1,000 if the Brix value is below 0.)
2.  Correction coefficients 
a and b are calculated from the low and high specific gravity values 
obtained from S.G. calibration. 
  a = 
SGL – SGH
KL – KH
  b = SGL – (a × KL)

Light source (LED) Flow cell Sample route Prism Slit
Specific gravimeter unit
CCD image sensor





1-8
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
A
3.  The obtained specific gravity value of the sample is corrected using correction coefficients a and 
b. 
  SGx = a × SGx´ + b
    SGx:  Sample’s specific gravity after calibration correction
    SGx´:  Sample’s specific gravity before calibration correction
    SGH:  Specific gravity reference of standard solution (high)
    SGL:  Specific gravity reference of standard solution (low)
    KH:  Specific gravity of standard solution (high)
    KL:  Specific gravity of standard solution (low)
Furthermore, high concentrations of glucose (GLU) and protein (PRO) will affect specific gravity. 
Therefore, specific gravity is corrected using the concentrations of glucose and protein obtained 
from test strip measurement. 
  SG = SGx – CGLU – CPRO
    SG:  Specific gravity after GLU and PRO correction
    SGx:  Specific gravity obtained from formula 3.
    CGLU:  Corrected GLU value
    CPRO:  Corrected PRO value
Correction values (Unit of concentration: mg/dL)
GLU concentration 0 10 30 50 70 100
Correction value 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0002 0.0003 0.0004
150 200 300 500 1000 OVER
0.0006 0.0008 0.0012 0.0020 0.0040 0.0040
PRO concentration 0 5 10 20 30 50 70
Correction value 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0001 0.0001 0.0002 0.0002
100 150 200 250 300 600 OVER
0.0003 0.0005 0.0006 0.0008 0.0009 0.0018 0.0018
Color-Tone Measurement
An internal turbidity/color measurement unit measures sample color using transmitted light.

470 nm/525 nm/635 nm 
multiple wavelength LED
Cylindrical cell (i.d. 1.8 mm)
Photodiode (transmitted light)
Photodiode (Scattered light)





AX-4030
1-9
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
A
In color-tone measurement, red (635 nm), green 
(525 nm) and blue (470 nm) lights are irradiated on 
the sample in the cylindrical tube and the hue and 
contrast of the sample are obtained from the amount 
of transmitted light.
The color is evaluated against 23 standard colors 
consisting of light, normal and dark shades of yellow, 
orange, brown, red, violet, blue and green (21 total), 
plus colorless and other. 
Hue is obtained from the areas in the coordinate 
system at right. Coordinates are calculated as follows:
1. XYZ stimulus is obtained. 
  X = ( (a × R) + (b × G) + (c × B) ) ÷ 1000
  Y = ( (d × R) + (e × G) + (f × B) ) ÷ 1000
  Z = ( (g × G) + (h × B) ) ÷ 1000
  R:  Transmission intensity of 635 nm light
  G:  Transmission intensity of 525 nm light
  B:  Transmission intensity of 470 nm light
  a to h:  Correction coefficients 
2. The x and y color coordinates are obtained from formula 1.
  x = X ÷ (X + Y + Z)
  y = Y ÷ (X + Y + Z)
3. The density is obtained from formula 2.
Contrast and hue indications (23 colors)
COLORLESS
YELLOW LIGHT, normal and DARK 
are indicated for each color. 
Example:  LIGHT YELLOW, 
YELLOW, and 
DARK YELLOW
ORANGE
BROWN
RED
VIOLET
BLUE
GREEN
OTHER
(x
2
 + y
2
)

y
x
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE
COLORLESS
VIOLET
RED
BROWN
ORANGE

Color classification





1-10
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
A
Turbidity Measurement
An internal turbidity/color measurement unit measures sample turbidity using transmitted and 
scattered lights.
Light of 635 nm is irradiated on the sample in the cylindrical cell and turbidity is calculated using 
the formula below.
    T:  Turbidity
    Ss:  Scattered light of sample
    Ts:  Transmitted light of sample
    Sw:  Scattered light of washing solution
    Tw:  Transmitted light of washing solution
    K:  Factory-set instrument coefficient 
Turbidity is determined by the obtained T value.
T range Turbidity Output
T < (Level 1)
Clear –
(Level 1) ≤ T < (Level 2) Turbid 1+
(Level 2) ≤ T Densely turbid 2+
* (Level 1) and (Level 2) are constants.

470 nm/525 nm/635 nm 
multiple wavelength LED
Cylindrical cell (i.d. 1.8 mm)
Photodiode (transmitted light)
Photodiode (Scattered light)

Ss
Ts
T =
(
–
Sw
Tw
)
/
K





AX-4030
1-11
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.1.5    Rank Table
Measurement results are represented as qualitative and/or semi-quantitative values as listed below. 
The shaded areas   contain abnormal values, which are preceded by an abnormal mark (*) on 
the displayed and printed reports.
GLU (glucose)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Qualitative – ± 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative (mg/dL)
30 50 70 100 150 200 300 500 1000 OVER
PRO (protein)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Qualitative – ± 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative (mg/dL)
10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 600 OVER
BIL (bilirubin)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Qualitative – 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative (mg/dL)
0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 OVER
URO (urobilinogen)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Qualitative
NORMAL
1+ 2+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative (mg/dL)
2 3 4 6 8 12 OVER
PH (pH)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Value 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0
BLD (blood)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Qualitative – ± 1+ 2+ 3+
Semiquantitative (mg/dL)
0.03 0.06 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 OVER
KET (ketones)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Qualitative – ± 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+
Semiquantitative (mg/dL)
10 20 40 60 80 100 150 OVER





1-12
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
NIT (nitrite)
Rank 1 2 3
Qualitative – 1+ 2+
LEU (leukocytes)
Rank 1 2 3 4 5
Qualitative –
Semiquantitative (Leu/μL) 25 75 250 500





AX-4030
1-13
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
The instrument boxes in three cartons. Unpack the boxes and make sure you have all items listed in 
this section. If anything is missing or damaged, contact your distributor.
  1.2.1    Instrument
No. Item Description Qty.
1 Instrument AUTION MAX AX-4030 1
2 Waste box 1
  1.2.2    Sampler
No. Item Description Qty.
1 Sampler Rack type 1

1. Instrument 
2. Waste box 

Sampler

Unpacking1.2





1-14
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  1.2.3    Accessories
No. Items Descriptions Qty.
1 Washing solution bottle With a liquid sensor cord, 2 L 1
2 Drain bottle 3 L 1
3 Power cord The type of power cord supplied varies depending on the 
country.
1
4 Thermal printer paper 58-mm width, 5 rolls 1
5 Rack set 10 item racks with rubber cushions 1
6 Start rack With rubber cushions and light blue adapters 1
7 STAT and control rack With rubber cushions, and orange and blue adapters 1
8 Adapters Gray colored 100
9 Accessory case See page 1-15. 1
10 Operating manual This manual 1
11 Error and trouble list 1

5. Rack set 
9. Accessory case  10. Operating manual  11. Error and trouble list 
6. Start rack  7. STAT and control rack  8. Adapter (gray) 
Light blue adapter
Black label
Orange adapter × 7
Dark blue adapter × 3
Black label
2. Drain bottle 3. Power cord
4. Thermal printer paper
1. Washing solution bottle





AX-4030
1-15
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
H
  1.2.4    Accessory Case
No. Items Descriptions Qty.
1 Check strip set White check strips × 2, Gray check strips × 2 1
2 Phillips screwdriver No.2, plastic insulated 1
3 Filter set Mesh filter, O-ring (5 pieces for each) 1
4 Fuses T5AE250V~ × 2 1
5 Tygon tube For washing solution bottle
1/16” (i.d.) × 3/16” (o.d.), 2 m × 1
1
6 Silicon tube For drain bottle
3 mm (i.d.) × 6 mm (o.d.), 4 m × 1
1
7 Silicon tubes For drain pinch valves
2 mm (i.d.) × 4 mm (o.d.), 100 mm × 2
1
8 Blower brush 1
9 White plate 1
10 Tweezers L125 1

1. Check strip set
5. Tygon tube 6. Silicon tube 7. Silicon tubes
8. Blower brush 10. Tweezers9. White plate
3. Filter set 4. Fuses
2. Phillips screwdriver





1-16
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  1.3.1    Front View
No. Components Descriptions
1 Standby switch Use this switch to turn on and off the instrument for daily use. The 
switch lamp illuminates green while the power is on.
2 Front cover  This protects the nozzle drive unit and prevents users from accidentally 
touching the nozzle.
3 Operator panel There are operation keys for starting measurement and entering 
numeric values. See 
“1.7 Basic Operations” on page 1-40.
4 Display You can view results and check status information here.
5 Built-in printer This thermal printer prints results and parameter settings.
6 Feeder protective cover This cover protects two feeders.
7 Feeder cover 1 This cover has a locking lever to open and close feeder 1.
8 Feeder cover 2 This cover has a locking lever to open and close feeder 2.
9 Side cover The pumps for aspirating samples, for staining samples on test strips, 
and for flushing the washing solution are located inside. The trap bottle 
is also attached here. 
10 Maintenance cover Open this cover to clean inside the instrument.
11 Loading side Place sample racks with samples loaded here.
12 STAT port Load a sample for port STAT measurement here.
13 Unloading side The sample racks are discharged here after sample aspiration. If the 
instrument has been set for loop transportation, you can load 5 more 
sample racks to be measured here.
14 White plate cover Open this cover to replace the white plate.
15 Built-in barcode reader The barcode reader reads barcodes labeled on sample tubes.
16 Drain pinch valves These valves control drainage flow.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
11 
13
14
12
With the side cover open 
16

Components1.3





AX-4030
1-17
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.3.2    Rear View
No. Components Descriptions
1 Drain joint (D) Connect the tube from the drain bottle here.
2 Washing solution joint (W) Connect the tube from the washing solution bottle here.
3 Washing solution sensor terminal 
(S)
Connect the liquid sensor cord of the washing solution bottle 
here.
4 Hand-held barcode reader terminal 
(H)
Connect the optional hand-held barcode reader here.
5 Data output terminal (P)* Connect the communication cable from an RS-232C port of 
an external device here.
6 Data output terminal (E) Connect the communication cable from an RS-232C port of 
the AX-4030-exclusive device here.
7 START terminal (1) Use these terminals to attach the extended sampler or joining 
unit A.
8 STOCK terminal (2)
9 Cooling fan The fan exhausts heated air to keep the inside of the 
instrument cool.
10 Cooling fan The fan draws in air from outside to cool the inside of the 
instrument.
11 Main power switch Press this switch to turn on or off the main power supply. 
Keep this switch on for daily use, and turn it off when cleaning 
specific components or during long-term disuse.
12 Power input terminal Connect the power cord which came with the instrument here.
13 Waste box tray Attach the waste box here to collect used test strips.
*  This terminal can be replaced with the Ethernet terminal (optional Ethernet board) to connect the instrument to a LAN. 
For more information, contact your distributor.

W
H P 1 2
E
S
D
9
1110
8
12
13
1
4 5
6
7
3
2





1-18
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.4.1    Precautions in Instrument Installation
Before installation of the instrument, read the following notes and always take proper safety 
precautions.
■  The instrument weighs about 37 kg and the sampler about 4 kg. Determine a 
location for the instrument and assemble it in that location. Do NOT carry the 
instrument with the sampler attached. Separate the two units before moving. For 
safety reasons, always transport and assemble the instrument with the help of at 
least one other person. Hold the bottom of the instrument with both hands when 
carrying it.
■ During installation, be careful not to pinch your hands under the instrument.
■  Install the instrument at least 20 cm away from walls. Inadequate clearance 
between the instrument and walls may cause overheating of the instrument 
or undesirable load on cable connections, thus resulting in fire or incorrect 
measurement results.
■  Ensure at least 10 cm clearance between walls and the left panel (viewed from 
the front) for users to be able to draw the waste box and dispose of the used 
test strips. Insufficient distances may block the waste box. Also, users will have 
trouble trying to turn off the main power switch and disconnect connectors in the 
event of errors or trouble.
■  Install the instrument where temperature and humidity can be maintained in the 
following ranges:
  Temperature:  10°C - 30°C  
  Humidity:  20% - 80% 
    Installation in the measurement environment outside these ranges may result in 
incorrect measurement results.
■  Install the instrument on a level, vibration-free sturdy platform. Operation of 
the instrument in an unstable place may cause trouble or malfunction of the 
instrument resulting in personal injury. DO NOT install the instrument where it 
may fall off or topple over.
■  Do not install the instrument near places that store chemicals or near equipment 
that generates corrosive gas or electrical noise. Chemicals, corrosive gases and 
electrical noise may cause fire or damage to the instrument and consequently 
lead to personal injury, or may otherwise cause incorrect measurement results.
Install the instrument under the supervision of a serviceperson. It is 
dangerous to handle the instrument with the covers open. High voltage 
parts are located inside. Contact could be dangerous.
Installation1.4





AX-4030
1-19
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
■  Install the instrument in a place not exposed to direct sunlight, condensation 
or wind. These factors may cause incorrect measurement results, as well as 
deformation of or damage to the instrument.
■  Apply the correct voltage (100 to 240 V AC) and frequency (50/60 Hz) to the 
instrument. The wrong voltage and frequency may result in fire or damage to the 
instrument and consequently lead to personal injury.
■  Use the power cord that came with the instrument for the electrical connection to 
avoid electric shock and fire.
■  Connect the instrument’s power cord directly to a single outlet, without using an 
extension cord or power tap. The maximum power supply for the instrument is 
150 VA.
■  Use the specified RS-232C cross cable to connect an external device to the 9-pin 
data output terminal of the instrument, to avoid electric shock and fire. For more 
information, contact your distributor.
■  Use the specified Ethernet cable to connect an external device to the Ethernet 
terminal that is provided when the optional Ethernet board is installed in the 
instrument. Use of other cables may cause electric shock or fire. For more 
information, contact your distributor.
■  The START (1) and STOCK (2) terminals are used to connect optional joining 
unit A or an expansion sampler. Connecting to other devices may cause damage 
to the instrument. For the installation of these optional parts or precautions 
on operating them, contact your distributor. Install optional parts under the 
supervision of a serviceperson. Confirm operating precautions with the 
serviceperson ahead of use.
■  DO NOT disassemble the instrument unless required for installation. DO NOT 
modify the instrument. Disassembly and modification of the instrument may 
result in exposure to pathogenic microbes or cause fire or damage to the 
instrument and consequently lead to personal injury.
■  If you need to disassemble the instrument after use, wear protective gloves to 
prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.





1-20
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  1.4.2    Unlocking the Instrument
To prevent the instrument from being damaged in transport, various parts are anchored before 
shipping from the factory. Remove these retainers before installing the instrument. Also, before 
doing anything, read “1.4.1 Precautions” on page 1-18.
Prepare: Phillips screwdriver
REFERENCE: Keep your removed screws in the accessory case. These screws will be needed 
the next time the instrument is moved.
  1    Remove the anchoring tape.
1 Remove the anchoring tape at the locations shown 
in the right figure.
• Also, remove the tape from the waste box tray on 
the left panel.
  2    Unlock the nozzle drive section.
1 Open the front cover.
2 Loosen the screw that locks the nozzle drive using a 
Phillips screwdriver, and remove it.
3 Loosen the two screws on the retainer of the nozzle 
drive with a Phillips screwdriver, and remove the 
retainer.
NOTE: Take care not to drop the screws inside the 
instrument.
4 Close the front cover.

Waste box tray (left panel) 

Front cover 

Retainer
Screw
Screws
2
3





AX-4030
1-21
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3    Remove the anchoring tape from the identification section.
1 Make sure both feeder covers are locked.
2 Open the maintenance cover.
3 Open the feeder protective cover.
• The cover stops at a 120° angle.
• This cover can be removed from the instrument by 
unhooking the hinge.
4 Open the side cover.
5 Tilt the feeder unit to the right.
• The feeder unit is locked with the latch shown with 
the circles in the figure. So, first you need to pull 
the whole feeder unit to the right with a little force 
to open the latch.
NOTE: Do not apply excessive pressure to the 
feeder unit when in the tilted position, as this may 
cause damage to the instrument.
6 Remove the anchoring tape.
7 Stand the feeder unit straight up.
• Once the feeder is standing up straight, press the 
feeder downward until the latch clicks and the unit 
locks in place.

Feeder protective cover
Feeder 
covers
Side cover
Maintenance cover
3
2
4

Feeder unit

Anchoring 
tape





1-22
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  4    Close the covers.
1 Close the covers in the order of the side cover (a), 
feeder protective cover (b), and maintenance cover 
(c).

Feeder protective cover
(a)
(b)
(c)
Side cover
Maintenance cover





AX-4030
1-23
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.4.3    Attaching the Sampler
Prepare: Sampler, and Phillips screwdriver
  1    Open the splash guard.
1 Insert the tip of a Phillips screwdriver in the screw 
holes on the splash guard to loosen the two screws 
inside.
2 Slide the cover upward.
3 Temporarily tighten one of the screws using the 
screwdriver to prevent the cover from dropping.
  2    Connect the sampler cables to the instrument.
1 Place the sampler in front of the instrument.
2 Connect the two cables from the sampler to the 
connectors on the lower part of the front panel.
3 Lock the connectors to avoid disconnection.
4 Loosen the earth anchoring screw from the 
instrument with the Phillips screwdriver, and 
remove it.
5 Fit the earth anchoring screw through the eye of the 
sampler’s earth line and reattach the screw in its 
original position.

Screw holes
Splash guard

Sampler connectors
Earth 
anchoring 
screw

Earth
Earth
anchoring screw





1-24
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
6 Feed the sampler cables through the left side of the 
instrument.
7 Loosen the temporarily-tightened screw using a 
Phillips screwdriver, and slide the splash guard 
down.
NOTE: Make sure the cables do not get caught in 
the splash guard.
8 Tighten the two screws using a Phillips screwdriver to secure the splash guard.
  3    Attach the sampler to the instrument.
1 Fit the hooks on both sides of the sampler into the 
holes on the instrument.
• Be careful not to pinch the cables and earth line.
2 Loosen the locking nut on the instrument legs close 
to the sampler.
3 Turn the adjuster feet until the sampler rises an even 
5 mm off the countertop.
• Check that the instrument has a clearance of about 
20 mm from the countertop.
4 Tighten the locking nuts to lock the adjuster feet in place.

Screw holes
Splash guard
Cables

Hook

Instrument Sampler
5 mm
About 20 mm
Turn here to adjust height.
Loosen 
this nut.





AX-4030
1-25
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  4    Adjust the auxiliary legs of the sampler.
NOTE: Lower the auxiliary legs of the sampler until they contact the countertop. Unless the 
sampler is stable, it can deform under its own weight and the samples and the nozzle can be 
damaged.
NOTE: The sampler has one auxiliary leg on each the right and left side of the bottom panel 
and another one below the STAT port. Lower all three legs to the countertop. The sampler is 
unstable on just one or two auxiliary legs.
1 Remove the two rubber caps from the sampler. 
• You can see the screw heads of the auxiliary legs.
2 Turn the auxiliary leg screws clockwise with a 
Phillips screwdriver until the auxiliary legs contact 
the countertop.
NOTE: Excessively turning the auxiliary legs will 
cause the sampler to rise. Lower the auxiliary legs 
until they just contact the countertop.
3 Reattach the rubber caps.
4 Open the front cover.
5 Locate the screw head of the auxiliary leg at the 
back of the STAT port.
6 Turn the screw until the auxiliary leg below the 
STAT port contacts the countertop.
7 Close the front cover.

Screw head of 
the auxiliary legs
Countertop
Rubber 
cap
Auxiliary legs

Screw head of 
the auxiliary leg
STAT port viewed from above





1-26
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.4.4    Installing the Washing Solution Bottle
Prepare:  Concentrated washing solution 3 (for AUTION MAX), purified water,  
washing solution bottle, sealing film, and Tygon tube
REFERENCE: Purchase the concentrated washing solution 3, which is not supplied with the 
instrument. 
  1    Prepare the washing solution.
1 Dilute concentrated washing solution 3 with 
purified water.
NOTE: Check the correct dilution rate on the bottle 
label of the concentrated washing solution 3.
2 Uncap the washing solution bottle.
3 Pour the diluted washing solution into the washing 
solution bottle.
4 Seal the bottle with a piece of sealing film.
5 While holding the film in your hand, gently invert 
the bottle so as not to froth the solution.
NOTE: Keep foreign matter out of the bottle and solution as this may cause the filter in the flow 
line to clog.
  2    Install the washing solution bottle.
1 Remove the sealing film from the bottle, and attach 
the bottle cap.

Concentrated washing 
solution 3
Purified water
1800 mL
200 mL
Example: To prepare 2000 mL of ten-fold 
                diluted washing solution

Sealing film
Washing 
solution bottle

Bottle cap





AX-4030
1-27
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3    Connect the sensor cord and tube.
1 Connect the liquid sensor cord from the bottle cap to the washing solution sensor terminal “S” on 
the rear panel.
2 Cut the Tygon tube to an appropriate length (max. 1 m).
NOTE: Use of a longer tube may interfere with solution filling. Keep the remaining tube in the 
accessory case for replacement.
3 Fit one end of the Tygon tube over the washing solution joint “W” on the rear panel.
4 Fit the other end of the tube over the washing solution nozzle of the bottle cap.
NOTE: Care should be taken not to tear the tube by forcing it.

WD

HS

Liquid sensor cord
Washing solution joint
Washing solution sensor terminal
Tygon tube
3
1
4
Washing solution bottle





1-28
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.4.5    Installing the Drain Bottle
   Set the drain bottle at the same or a lower height than the surface that the 
instrument sits on. If higher than the instrument base, liquid waste may 
not drain properly and consequently leak. Contacting liquid waste with 
unprotected hands may expose you to pathogenic microbes.
Urine samples and solution are discharged into the drain bottle. Place the bottle on a flat, level surface.
Prepare: Drain bottle and silicon tube [3 mm (i.d.) × 6 mm (o.d.), 4 m]
  1    Connect the tube to the drain bottle.
1 Cut the silicon tube to an appropriate length.
2 Remove the joint from the drain bottle. Insert one 
end of the silicon tube into the joint until the tube 
extends about 5 cm from the joint.
3 Reattach the joint to the bottle cap, and tighten it 
securely.
  2    Connect the tube to the instrument.
   
Do not bend or pinch the silicon tube of the drain bottle. Also, keep 
objects off of the tube. If liquid waste clogs inside the tube, the tube may 
disconnect from the instrument and spill contained liquid. Contacting liquid 
waste with unprotected hands may expose you to pathogenic microbes.
1 Fit the other end of the tube over the drain joint “D” on the rear panel.

Drain bottle
Silicon tube
Joint
Cap
5 cm

WD

Drain bottle
Silicon tube
Drain joint





AX-4030
1-29
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.4.6    Installing the Waste Box
Install the waste box for collecting used test strips.
  1    Pull out the waste box tray.
1 Pull out the waste box tray from the left panel of the 
instrument.
  2    Install the waste box.
1 Hold the waste box tab facing forward, and place 
the box on the waste box tray.
• Ensure the waste box guides fit the concaves inside 
the tray.
2 Store the waste box tray in the instrument.
• If the waste box is correctly set in the tray, it is held 
steadily by the magnets.
• If the waste box gets caught halfway, it is set 
incorrectly.
NOTE: Ensure the waste box correctly fits into the 
tray before pushing it in. Incorrect installation may 
cause used test strips to be scattered around 
inside the instrument or to clog the test strip path.

Waste box tray

One guide
Tab
Two guides





1-30
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.4.7    Connecting the Power Cord and External Devices
Connect the instrument to a receptacle using the supplied power cord, and also to an external 
device as needed.
Prepare: Power cord and, if necessary, communication cable for the external device
   Use the specified RS-232C cross cable or Ethernet cable to connect an 
external device to the instrument. Connections using cables other than 
these can cause electric shock and fire. For more information, contact your 
distributor.
  1    Connect the power cord.
1 Ensure the main power switch is in the off position.
• The main power switch should be depressed to the 
°
 (off) side.
2 Insert the female connector of the power cord into 
the power input terminal on the rear panel.
3 Insert the male connector of the power cord into a 
receptacle.
REFERENCE: The type of power cord supplied 
varies depending on the country.
  2    Connect an external device (if necessary).
NOTE: Use the specified RS-232C cross cable or Ethernet cable to connect an external device 
to the instrument.
1 Connect one end of the communication cable to a data output terminal on the rear panel.
2 When using an RS-232C cable, tighten the safety screws to secure it.
3 For the connection of the other end of the cable, see the manual of the external device.
REFERENCE: The external output capability is disabled by default. To have the instrument 
communicate with an external device, change the appropriate parameter setting. See “3.4.3 
Enabling/Disabling the External Output” on page 3-20.

Power cord
Power input 
terminal
Main power switch

Power cord
Receptacle





AX-4030
1-31
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
G
This section describes what you should do next after completing installation; it includes turning on 
the power and setting up the printer and system clock. How to turn off the power is also explained 
at the end of this section.
  1.5.1    Turning On the Power for the First Time
Use the following procedure to turn on the instrument for the first time after installation. It will take 
about 2 minutes for the instrument to complete warm-up.
  1    Turn on the main power switch.
1 Press the I (on) side of the main power switch on 
the rear panel.
  2    Turn on the standby switch.
1 Press the standby switch on the left side of the front 
panel.
• The standby switch will light green.
• The message “Please wait...” will appear for a 
maximum of 20 seconds, followed by the product 
name and program version for about 2 seconds.
NOTE: If the initial memory check detects a problem, the instrument will inform you of it by 
indicating an appropriate warning (W), error (E), or trouble (T) code before displaying the 
program version. For more information, see Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting”.

Main power switch

Standby
switch

Please wait...
          AX-4030    V1.00

Starting Up1.5





1-32
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
• The instrument will read the parameter settings, and 
then initialize the hardware.
• Warm-up will complete in 2 minutes and the 
standby screen shown at right will appear. You 
will see the current date and time, the factory-set 
measurement start number, and test strip settings.

  Startup
  
  
  Initializing...
  Please wait...

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  10:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
Standby screen





AX-4030
1-33
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
G
  1.5.2    Setting up the Printer and System Clock
Before using the instrument, load the thermal printer paper into the built-in printer and set the 
system clock.
Prepare: Thermal printer paper
  1    Load the thermal printer paper.
1 Load a roll of paper into the built-in printer.
• For more information, see steps  2  in “4.3.2 
Replacing the Thermal Printer Paper” on page  
4-17.
  2    Set the system clock.
1 Set the clock to the current date and time.
• For detailed instructions, see “3.4.1 Setting the 
System Clock” on page 3-17.

  System clock setup
  (3100)             2006-01-09  10:00
  Date
  <05-12-22> (YY-MM-DD)
  Time
  <11:30>





1-34
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  1.5.3    Turning Off the Power
Use the following procedure to turn off the instrument.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed.
• If a different screen is displayed, press Go back  to 
return to the standby screen.
2 Press the standby switch.
• The light of the standby switch will turn off, 
indicating the instrument has powered off.
REFERENCE: When you are to use the instrument 
almost every day, keep the main power switch on 
and use the standby switch to turn on or off the 
instrument.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  10:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

Standby
switch





AX-4030
1-35
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.6.1    Precautions in Instrument Relocation
Before relocating the instrument, read the following instructions and always take proper safety 
precautions.
■  Remove the drain bottle, washing solution bottle and sampler from the 
instrument.
■  Drain washing solution from the flow line. Moving the instrument with washing 
solution in the flow line may damage the instrument.
■  Turn off the power by pressing the standby switch followed by the OFF side of the 
main power switch. Then, disconnect the power cord.
■  Disconnect the optional hand-held barcode reader and the communication cables 
for external devices, if any, from the rear panel of the instrument.
■  Make sure the front, maintenance and side covers are closed before relocating 
the instrument. Moving the instrument with any of the covers open may expose 
you to pathogenic microbes or damage the instrument.
■  Make sure there are no test strips left inside the instrument before relocating the 
instrument. Moving the instrument with used test strips inside may expose you to 
pathogenic microbes or damage the instrument.
■  For safety reasons, always move the instrument with the help of at least one other 
person. Hold the bottom of the instrument with both hands and be careful not to 
impact or shake the instrument. Rough handling may damage the instrument.
■  Read 
“1.4.1 Precautions in Instrument Installation” on page 1-18 before relocating 
the instrument.
  1.6.2    Checking for Leftover Test Strips
Prepare: Protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used protective gloves, test strips and liquid waste in accordance 
with local regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Check for test strips in the feeders.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed.
2 Open the 2 feeder covers.
Relocation1.6





1-36
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
3 Return any test strips found in the feeders to the bottle.
  2    Check for used test strips.
1 Pull out the waste box tray to check if there are any used test strips in the box.
• Discard the used strips, if there are any.
  1.6.3    Discharging the Washing Solution
Prepare: Protective gloves and tissue paper
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used protective gloves and liquid waste in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Discharge the washing solution from the flow lines.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then press the standby switch to turn off the power.
2 Uncap the washing solution bottle.
• Place the cap on tissue paper to protect it against dust.
3 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• During warm-up, washing solution will be discharged from the flow lines.
  1.6.4    Unplugging the Power Cord
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then press the standby switch to turn off the power.
2 Press the OFF side of the main power switch on the rear panel to turn off the main power.
3 Pull out the power cord from the receptacle.
4 Disconnect the power cord from the power input terminal on the rear panel.





AX-4030
1-37
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.6.5    Disconnecting the Tubes, Sensor Code, and Cables
Prepare: Protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used protective gloves and liquid waste in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Disconnect the tube of the drain bottle.
1 Disconnect the tube of the drain bottle from the drain joint “D” on the rear panel.

To drain bottle

WD





1-38
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2   
Disconnect the liquid sensor cord and tube of the washing solution bottle.
1 Disconnect the liquid sensor cord from the washing solution sensor terminal “S” on the rear 
panel.
2 Disconnect the tube of the washing bottle from the washing solution joint “W” on the rear panel.
  3    Disconnect cables to the optional part and external devices.
1 If an optional hand-held barcode reader or external device is connected to the instrument, 
disconnect their cables from the instrument.
  1.6.6    Detaching the Sampler
Prepare: Phillips screwdriver
  1    Detach the sampler.
1 Carefully lift the sampler straight upward with both 
hands and pull to the front.
• This unhooks the sampler in 2 locations.

Tube
Liquid sensor cord
❷
❶
To washing solution bottle

WD

HS

Hook





AX-4030
1-39
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2    Disconnect the sampler cables from the instrument.
1 Loosen the earth anchoring screw with a Phillips 
screwdriver and disconnect the earth line from the 
instrument.
2 Insert the tip of a Phillips screwdriver in the screw 
holes on the splash guard to loosen the two screws 
inside.
3 Slide the splash guard upward.
4 Temporarily tighten one of the screws using the 
screwdriver to prevent the splash guard from 
dropping.
5 Disconnect the two sampler cables from the 
connectors on the lower part of the front panel.
• The sampler is now detached completely from the 
instrument.
  1.6.7    Relocating the Instrument
1 Move the instrument to its new location.
IMPORTANT: For safety reasons, always move the instrument with the help of at least one 
other person. Hold the bottom of the instrument with both hands when carrying it.
2 See “1.4 Installation” on page 1-18 to install the instrument.

Earth line
Earth
anchoring
screw

Screw hole
Splash guard
Cable

Sampler connectors





1-40
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
F
The operator panel has 16 operation keys and a 34-column by 14-line color liquid crystal display. 
This section describes basic instructions you should learn in order to run urine tests and make 
parameter settings.
  1.7.1    Components on the Operator Panel
No. Icons Names Descriptions
1 Display Up to 4 currently available function labels appear on the lowest line of 
the display.
2 Start key Press this key to start measurement.
3 Stop key Press this key to stop measurement in progress or menu operation.
4 Stat key Press this key to reserve a STAT measurement.
5 Feed key Hold down this key to advance the thermal printer paper of the built-in 
printer.
6 Enter key Press this key to confirm your entry or selection or to move the cursor 
down.
7 — Hyphen key Press this key to select an option for a setup item, move the cursor 
between entry fields, or enter a hyphen for IDs.
8 0 to 9 Alphanumeric 
keys
Use these keys to enter numeric values. On the menu screens, these 
keys can work as cursor keys (see the “REFERENCE” below). For ID 
entries, use these keys to enter alphabetical characters.
9 Function keys Press the function key just below the function label to activate the 
corresponding function.
REFERENCE: Using the numeric keys as cursor keys 
The numeric keys, 8, 2, 4, 6, double as cursor keys for selecting options on the setup screens. 
The cursor key functions are disabled for alphanumeric entry fields. 
8: Select the last option.  4: Select the previous option. 
2: Select the first option.   6: Select the next option.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  10:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
9
Function labels 

Basic Operations1.7





AX-4030
1-41
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  1.7.2    Screen Configuration
This section describes the configuration of the screens you will see while operating the instrument.
■ Standby screen
The standby screen is initially displayed 
after warm-up completes, telling you the 
instrument is ready to accept instructions 
from you (e.g. to measure samples or set 
parameters). Always return to the standby 
screen after the completion of these tasks.
■ Menu screens
Pressing   Menu   on the standby screen 
activates the hierarchical menu system 
that allows you to access various 
auxiliary operation options. The 
screen number can be referred to when 
contacting your distributor for service.
■ Setup screens
When an option is selected on a menu 
screen, the appropriate setup screen 
appears. Setup screens contain one or 
more setup items. Below each setup item 
is a selection field for selecting an option 
or an entry field for inputting numbers or 
characters.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  10:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
Date and time
Current 
settings
Function labels

  View
  (2300)             2006-01-09  11:07
  Date
  <06-01-06> - <06-01-08> (YY-MM-DD)
  Measurement
  [Normal & STAT measurements        ]
  Results
  [All                               ]
  Range of results
  [Measurement No.                   ]
             BS        OK      Cancel
Setup item
Selection field 
or entry field

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
                              Go back
Screen number
Screen name
To select an option, press the key 
of the corresponding number.
To one-level 
higher screen
Options





1-42
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  1.7.3    Menu Operations and Examples
Basic Operations
■ Function labels and function keys
The lowest line of the screen contains up to four 
function labels for activating different functions 
depending on the status of the instrument. Each 
function label corresponds to the function key (
°
) 
just below it. For example, “Press   Menu   ” refers 
to “press the function key below the function label  
  Menu   ”.
Frequently used functions are also assigned to the hardware keys on the operator panel. It is 
recommended to learn the functions commonly available through the measurement and setting 
operations because the later chapters in this manual do not include detailed descriptions of such 
functions.
Function labels Descriptions 
 Start  
This function label appears when the instrument is ready for measurement. Press this 
function key to start measurement, or restart the suspended measurement. The 
 
key on the operator panel also works in the same way.
  Stop   This function label appears while measurement is in progress. Press   Stop   to 
suspend the measurement process. The instrument then shifts to the end process 
before going on standby. The 
 key on the operator panel works in the same way. 
Until the end process begins, you can press 
 Start   to resume the suspended 
measurement.
 Cancel  This function label appears on the setup screens. Pressing  Cancel  aborts all the 
settings you made and brings you back to the previous screen.
   OK    This function label appears when a warning, error, or trouble occurs. Press    OK    to 
clear the problem.
Go back 
This function label appears on the menu screens or after the completion of a task. The 
instrument displays the previous screen each time 
Go back  is pressed until finally 
reaching the standby screen.
■ Menu screen operations
To select an option from a menu screen, press the 
numeric key corresponding to the number of that 
option.

  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
Function labels
Function keys

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
To select an option, 
press the key corresponding to this number.





AX-4030
1-43
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
■ Moving between setup items
The setup screen may contain two or 
more setup items. For example, the 
[View] screen shown at right has four 
setup items, [Date], [Measurement], 
[Results], and [Range of results].
• To go down to the next setup item,  
press   on the operator panel. 
• To go up to the previous item,  
press   .
• Pressing   with the cursor at the lowest setup item brings the cursor to the top. 
  Pressing   with the cursor at the top item moves the cursor to the bottom.
REFERENCE: About the cursor 
The cursor for this instrument refers to the highlighted portion on the display and prompts you 
to change options or to type in numeric values or text.
■ Selecting an option
Below the setup item (e.g. [Measurement] 
in the right figure), the currently selected 
option is displayed at first. The setting 
changes each time you press the hyphen 
key. For example, if the setup item has 4 
selectable options, pressing the hyphen key 
four times allows the first option to appear 
again.
REFERENCE: The numeric keys double 
as cursor keys. 
8: Select the last option. 
2: Select the first option.  
4: Select the previous option.  
6: Select the next option.

  View
  (2300)             2006-01-09  11:07
  Date
  <06-01-06> - <06-01-08> (YY-MM-DD)
  Measurement
  [Normal & STAT measurements        ]
  Results
  [All                               ]
  Range of results
  [Measurement No.                   ]
             BS        OK      Cancel

  Measurement
  [Normal & STAT measurements        ]
  Measurement
  [Normal measurement                ]
  Measurement
  [Check measurement                 ]
hyphen
hyphen
hyphen
Example: To select an option for [Measurement]





1-44
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Entering Alphanumerics
Use the keys on the operator panel to enter numeric values and alphabetic characters in the entry 
fields.
■ Numeric values
Entry fields that accept numeric values (e.g. a measurement number) have the cursor at the right-
most digit.
For example to enter “1302”: 
1 Press the numeric keys in the following order, 1, 3, 
0, and 2.
REFERENCE: To correct the entry, for example, from “1302” to “1402,” press    BS    three 
times to make it “0001”, then type in “4”, “0”, and “2”. The cursor cannot move through digits.
■ Date
Entry fields that accept date information have the cursor at the “year” entry position at first. 
REFERENCE: The default date display format is “YY-MM-DD (year-month-day)”. If you are using 
a different format, “month-date-year” or “date-month-year”, set the date accordingly. 
For example, to enter April 15th, 2006:
1 To enter the year “06”, 
  press 0 and 6 in that order, and 
  press the hyphen key to move to the month entry 
position.
2 To enter the month “04 (April)”, 
  press 0 and 4 in that order, and 
  press the hyphen key to move to the day entry 
position.
3 To enter the day “15”, 
  press 1 and 5 in that order.
REFERENCE: When specifying a period of days... 
To move the cursor from the “start” field to the 
“end” field, press   .
REFERENCE: To modify the entry, just enter a new value. For example, to change “04” to “06”, 
place the cursor at “04” and press 0 and 6 in that order. The cursor cannot move between the 
first and second digits (e.g. between “0” and “4”).

  <1302>

  <06-11-07>

  <06-04-07>

  <06-04-15>

  <06-04-15> - <05-11-07>
Example: To specify a range of days





AX-4030
1-45
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
■ ID
This instrument can assign an ID to each sample or control. An ID can contain up to 18 digits, and 
include numbers, alphabetic characters (case sensitive), and hyphens (-).
For example, to enter “IM-060109-134”:
1 Press 4 four times to enter “I”.
  Each time 4 is pressed, the digit at the cursor will 
rotate in the order of “4”, “G”, “H”, “I”, “g”, “h”, 
“i” and back to “4” again.
2 Enter all numbers and characters you want in the 
same way.
REFERENCE: To enter the same number or character consecutively 
Press the hyphen key. For example, to enter “AA”, enter “A”, press the hyphen key, and 
enter “A”. Use the same method to enter different characters assigned to the same keys. For 
example, to enter “NO”, enter “N”, press the hyphen key, and enter “O”.
REFERENCE: To enter a special character 
Use the 0 key. Number “0” and special characters rotate in the following order each time 0 is 
pressed:
    0 (zero)  → * (asterisk)  → - (hyphen)  → ? (question mark) →
    ! (exclamation mark) → . (period)  → , (comma)  → + (plus)  → / (slash) → 0
■ To correct an entry
To correct an entry, press    BS    . The right-most digit is deleted each time    BS    is pressed. 
You cannot jump to the second or later digits to delete it. For example, to change “1302” to “1402”, 
press    BS    three times to delete “302”. With the field containing “0001”, enter “4”, “0”, and “2” 
in that order.

  <-----------------I>

  <IM-060109-00134>





1-46
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL





AX-4030
2-1
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Measurement
2.1  Before Making Measurements.................................2-2
  2.1.1  Flowchart of Operational Procedure ...........
2-2
  2.1.2  Measurement and Calibration .....................
2-3
  2.1.3  Measurement Terminology .........................
2-4
  2.1.4  Sample Containers and Sample Racks ......
2-7
2.2  Measurement Precautions .......................................2-9
  2.2.1  Handling the Instrument ..............................
2-9
  2.2.2  Handling Samples .....................................2-10
  2.2.3  Handling Test Strips .................................2-11
2.3  Preparation for Measurement................................2-12
  2.3.1  Checking Wastes and Consumables ........2-12
  2.3.2  Turning on the Power ...............................2-14
  2.3.3  Loading Test Strips into the Feeders ........2-16
  2.3.4  Assigning the Type of 
 
      Test Strips to the Item Racks ........2-19
  2.3.5  Preparing Samples ...................................2-21
2.4  Measurement Operations ......................................2-23
  2.4.1  Normal Measurement: Measuring 
 
      Samples Continuously ...................
2-23
  2.4.2  Port STAT Measurement: Measuring 
 
      a Higher Priority Sample
................2-27
  2.4.3  Rack STAT Measurement: Measuring 
 
      Higher Priority Samples .................2-31
2.5  S.G. Calibration.......................................................2-34
  2.5.1  Preparing S.G. Standard Solutions ...........
2-34
  2.5.2  Starting S.G. Calibration ...........................
2-36
2.6  Control Measurement.............................................2-38
2.7  Check Measurement...............................................2-43
2.8  Displayed and Printed Reports .............................2-49
  2.8.1  Displayed Results Report .........................
2-49
  2.8.2  Printed Results Report ..............................
2-50
  2.8.3  Abnormal Results List ...............................
2-54
  2.8.4  Error and Trouble List 
 
      (Automatic Report)  .......................
2-54
  2.8.5  Trouble List (Manual Report)  ...................
2-55
  2.8.6  Check Measurement Result Report ..........
2-56
  2.8.7  List of Current Parameter Settings ...........
2-57
Chapter
2





2-2
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
F

Before Making Measurements2.1
  2.1.1    Flowchart of Operational Procedure

Check the instrument
Press standby switch to power on.
Press standby switch to power off.
Standby screen
Standby screen again
1. Check for used test strips and liquid waste.
2. Check the washing solution and printer paper.
Load test strips
1. Load test strips into the feeders.
Make S.G. calibration
1. Prepare S.G. standard solutions and 
    measure S.G. standard values.
2. Load standard solutions.
3. Input standard solution values.
4. Start S.G. calibration.
* It is recommended to perform S.G. calibration 
  once a month.
Control measurement
1. Prepare test strips and check the main 
    feeder.
2. Prepare controls.
3. Load controls into STAT and control 
    rack.
4. Load rack into sampler.
5. Set start measurement No.
6. Press START.
7. When completed, take out sample 
    racks.
Check measurement
1. Clean strip transportation path inside 
    instrument.
2. Choose Check measurement from 
    menu.
3. Select feeder number for first check 
    strip.
4. Load check strip into feeder.
5. Press START to measure strip.
6. Print the first result.
7. Measure second test strip in the same 
    way.
8. Print the second result.
9. Interpret the results.
Prepare samples
1. Label sample tubes with barcodes, 
    if needed.
2. Pour samples into tubes.
3. Load samples into sample racks.
4. Load sample racks into sampler.
Normal measurement
1. Check the type of test strips and main 
    feeder.
2. Set the measurement start No.
3. Press START.
4. After completion, take out samples.
Daily maintenance
1. Return test strips in the feeders to the bottle.
2. Discard used test strips and clean waste box.
3. Discard liquid waste.
Set parameters
• Set the type of test strips for each feeder.
• Select the main feeder.
• Assign the type of test strips to the item 
  racks.
• Set the measurement start No.
*Change the measurement No. assignment and 
  result format as needed.
Port STAT measurement
For single sample
1. Prepare a STAT sample.
2. Place the sample in the STAT port.
3. Press STAT.
4. Set the type of test strips, measurement 
    No., and ID.
5. Press START.
6. When completed, take out the sample.
Rack STAT measurement
Max. 7 samples
1. Prepare STAT samples.
2. Load the samples into the STAT and 
    control rack.
• Press STAT to set the type of test strips 
  and measurement start No.
3. Load the STAT and control rack into the 
    sampler.
  Ready for measurement
                      2006-01-09 10:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal





AX-4030
2-3
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
F
  2.1.2    Measurement and Calibration
This instrument is capable of 4 types of measurements: normal measurement and STAT 
measurement for measuring patient samples, control measurement made to maintain measurement 
precision, and check measurement for checking to see that the instrument is working correctly.
■ Normal measurement
Normal measurement continuously measures a number of samples loaded in the sample racks. 
A sample rack can contain up to 10 samples. Place the sample racks with samples in the sampler 
and press the start key. The instrument then automatically transports the sample racks, aspirates 
the samples in order, and obtains the results. Up to 5 sample racks (50 samples) can be loaded 
into the sampler for one-way transportation, and up to 10 sample racks (100 samples) for loop 
transportation. For identification purposes, the results are given under serial measurement numbers, 
port numbers, and ID numbers from barcodes.
*  The instrument is factory-set to the one-way transportation mode. If you prefer loop transportation to measure more 
samples at a time, contact your distributor.
* For more information about measurement numbers and rack-port numbers, see the next page.
■ STAT measurement
STAT measurement is used to interrupt ongoing normal measurements and measure one or more 
urgent samples. There are two types of STAT measurements: 
  Port STAT measurement:   Measures a single sample loaded into the STAT port. If you have 
a sample to test urgently, you can load the sample into the STAT 
port to interrupt normal measurements in progress.
  Rack STAT measurement:   Interrupts normal measurements in progress to measure up to 7 
samples loaded into the STAT and control rack. 
■ Control measurement
The specified controls should be measured at regular intervals to maintain the precision of the 
instrument. Use the STAT and control rack to load the controls. Up to 3 types (or 3 concentrations) 
of controls can be used at a time.
■ S.G. calibration
S.G. calibration is for calibrating the instrument using two types of S.G. standard solutions (low 
and high solutions) that the operator prepares. It is recommended to perform S.G. calibration once a 
month.
■ Check measurement
If you suspect there is something wrong with obtained results, use the supplied check strips to 
check if the instrument is working correctly.





2-4
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  2.1.3    Measurement Terminology
■ Batch
A batch is a group of samples that the instrument measures successively. For practicality’s sake, a 
batch includes any number of samples measured after the start key has been pressed and until the 
instrument puts itself on standby again.
■ Measurement number
A measurement number is a 4-digit number given to each sample (or a port of the sample rack), 
and appears like “No. 0001” on displayed and printed results reports. Once you have set the 
measurement number for the first sample, the instrument automatically assigns consecutive 
numbers to the following samples. You have two alternative options for measurement numbering. 
One is to assign sequential numbers through batches, and the other is to reset the number at the 
beginning of each batch. Furthermore, you can assign the numbers either to samples or sample 
rack ports regardless of whether the ports have samples or not (see “3.2.3. Configuring the 
Measurement Numbering Method” on page 3-6). The measurement number is reset to “0001” at 
power-on.
■ Rack-port number
A rack-port number identifies the location of a sample by the sample rack port where the sample 
has been loaded, and consists of a 3-digit rack number and a 2-digit port number. Rack numbers 
are assigned to sample racks in the order in which they are loaded into the sampler and start with 
“001”. Port numbers are assigned to the ports of the sample rack and start with “01” for port 1. The 
rack-port number appears like “Po. 001-01” on the displayed and printed results reports.
Example:  First sample rack   001-01  001-02  001-03  001-04 .........
001-10
  Second sample rack  002-01  002-02  002-03  002-04 .........
002-10
REFERENCE: Four-digit port numbers for result printing, transmitting, and viewing operations 
Port numbers in a different format are used to specify a range of results you want to print, 
transmit, or review on the screen (see page 3-8). They are 4-digit numbers from 0000 to 9999, 
which identify the order of the sample racks in the sampler and the position of the ports where 
samples are present.

Port number
Rack number
Po. 001-01

1
Unloading side
2
3
4
5
Loading side
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Port numbers
Sample rack 1
Sample racks Printed results report
Port No.
0002
0003
0004
0010
0011
0012
0013
1
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Port numbers
2
Sample Empty
10
Sample rack 2





AX-4030
2-5
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
■ ID
With the barcode reader, the instrument can manage individual samples by IDs read from barcoded 
sample tubes. An ID can contain up to 18 digits and can include numbers, alphabet and special 
characters (see page 1-45). For port STAT measurement, you can manually input IDs by key 
operation. The ID edit feature is helpful to manually modify IDs that are misread by the barcode 
reader during measurement.
REFERENCE: Use of the barcode reader 
A barcode reader is built into the instrument as a standard feature, and a hand-held barcode 
reader is optionally available. The following table lists the ID-managed measurement tasks 
supported by each barcode reader.
Barcode readers Normal measurement Port STAT measurement Rack STAT measurement
Built-in type
N/A
Hand-held type N/A N/A
■ Sample rack transportation
The instrument supports two methods for transporting sample racks in the sampler: one way and 
loop. The instrument is configured for one-way transportation when shipped from the factory, and 
can be changed to loop transportation as needed. For more information, contact your distributor.
One-way transportation (standard)
Up to 5 sample racks (50 samples) can be loaded on the loading side (right side) of the sampler. 
The racks are discharged to the unloading side (left side) in turn as sample aspiration finishes.

Start measurement
1
Unloading side
How to load sample racks
Transport direction
2
3
4
5
Measuring
Loading side
Sample racks are transported to the 
unloading side after aspiration.
Completed





2-6
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Loop transportation
A total of 10 sample racks can be loaded in the sampler at a time: 5 racks on the loading side and 
another 5 racks on the unloading side. This means a maximum of 100 samples can be measured 
continuously.
The start rack must be placed at the beginning of a batch, and item racks or normal racks, in 
remaining locations (numbered 2 to 10 in the figure below). These racks are circulated in the 
sampler as the samples are aspirated, and the instrument automatically stops aspiration the next 
time it detects the start rack. To employ loop transportation, contact your distributor and ask to 
have parameter settings changed.

Start measurement
Start rack
10
9
8
7
6
Start rack
Unloading side
How to load sample racks
Transport direction
2
3
4
5
Stop when start 
rack is detected.
Measuring
Rack 
detector
Loading side





AX-4030
2-7
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  2.1.4    Sample Containers and Sample Racks
Sample Containers
Use the sample tubes that comply with the standards shown below. To have the built-in barcode 
reader read barcodes, place the labels in the correct position on the tubes.
Sample Racks
Four types of sample racks are available for use with the instrument. These racks can be identified 
by the markers on the front.
■ Item racks
The item racks are mainly used for normal measurement, and allow the instrument to automatically 
pick up the appropriate type of test strips for these racks from one of the two feeders.
Each item rack supplied with the instrument has a different rack ID (#01 to #10). For successful 
use of the item racks, assign one of the two feeders to each rack ID before testing samples. For 
example, you may assign feeder 1 to item racks #01 to #05, and feeder 2 to #06 to #10. For detailed 
instructions, see “2.3.4 Assigning the Type of Test Strips to the Item Racks” on page 2-19.
For sample preparation, load samples into the item rack assigned to the feeder that contains the test 
strips to apply. When detecting the item rack, the instrument automatically ejects the correct test 
strips from the feeder. This saves you the trouble of manually exchanging test strips.
The rack IDs are factory-set to “ ” on the [Rack assignment for test strip] screen which means that 
the test strips in the main feeder are used. Always select “ ” in a two-way communication system 
where the type of test strips is specified by the host.

Min. 30 mm
Min. 5 mm
105 mm
15.8 mm
Sample tube Barcode labeling

Gray adapters
Black label





2-8
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
■ STAT and control rack
The STAT and control rack is dedicated to STAT measurement and control measurement. 
STAT measurement requires samples to be loaded into ports 1 to 7, and control measurement 
requires controls to be loaded into ports 8 to 10.
■ Start rack
When the rack transportation method is set to “loop”, place the start rack at the beginning of a 
batch, and items racks (or normal racks) in the 2
nd
 to 10
th
 positions. The start rack has a black label 
that informs the instrument of the beginning and end of the batch to avoid measuring the same 
sample twice. In other words, when the racks are completely circulated in the sampler and the start 
rack returns to the initial position, the instrument detects the black label and automatically stops 
measurement.
■ Normal rack
The separately sold normal racks can also be used for normal measurement. These racks do not 
have rack IDs. So, samples in the normal racks are always measured with the test strips from the 
main feeder.

Orange adapters (ports 1 - 7)
Blue adapters (ports 8 - 10)
Black label

Light blue adapters
Black label

Gray adapters





AX-4030
2-9
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Measurement Precautions2.2
  2.2.1    Handling the Instrument
   This instrument is to be operated by qualified persons only. A qualified 
person is one having adequate knowledge of clinical testing and the 
disposal of infectious waste. Thoroughly read this operating manual 
before use. Anyone who operates the instrument for the first time must be 
assisted by a trained person.
   Never touch the nozzle, tubing, or other parts where sample may adhere 
with unprotected hands. During cleaning or maintenance of these parts, 
wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used samples, liquid waste, parts, and instrument in accordance 
with local regulations for biohazardous waste.
   Read “1.4.1 Precautions in Instrument Installation” on page 1-18, and 
ensure the instrument is installed in a proper environment before turning 
on the power. 
   Do not place containers or bottles that contain liquid on the instrument. 
Spilling inside the instrument may cause damage to the components.
   Never fail to clean or wash the specified components of the instrument 
to maintain measurement quality. For more information, see chapter 4 
“Maintenance”.
   If you detect abnormal odors or noise, immediately turn off the standby 
switch and then main power switch, and unplug the power cord. 
Continuous operation in such condition may result in fire or damage to the 
instrument and consequently lead to personal injury.
   In case of instrument trouble, contact your local distributor for repair. 
Unauthorized servicing or remodeling can damage the instrument and 
consequently lead to personal injury.
   Alcohol is sometimes needed to prepare measurements. Alcohol is readily 
combustible, therefore handle it carefully and keep away from flames, 
electrical sparks and sources of heat. Also, ventilate the room sufficiently 
during use.
The following sections describe precautions you should take when 
handing instrument, samples, and test strips. When you use the 
instrument for the first time, read through these sections before start 
measurement.





2-10
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2.2.2    Handling Samples
   TAKE THE UTMOST CARE WHEN HANDLING URINE. This instrument uses 
urine as sample and as an ingredient of control solution. Urine may be 
contaminated by pathogenic microbes that can cause infectious diseases. 
Improper handling of urine may cause infection to the user or other 
individuals by pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used samples, parts and liquid waste in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
■ Samples must be fresh urine collected within an hour.
If samples cannot be measured within an hour, seal and keep them refrigerated. Leaving samples at 
room temperature for 2 hours or more may alter chemical composition of the samples. Refrigerated 
samples must be brought to the measurement environment temperature before testing. 
■ Mix each sample well before measurement. Do not centrifuge samples.
Centrifuging may cause blood cells to precipitate, whereby producing incorrect results for some 
measurement items.
■ Remove bubbles and a film from the surface of the sample with tissue paper, etc.
The liquid level of the sample cannot be correctly detected if covered in bubbles and a film. If it 
is, the instrument cannot aspirate the volume of sample required for measurement, thus producing 
incorrect results.
■ Use samples as collected.
Do not add preservative, disinfectant, or detergent.
■ Do not place samples where exposed to direct sunlight.
Direct sunlight can alter the quality of samples, whereby producing incorrect results.
■ Hematuria and dense turbid urine may affect S.G. and color-tone measurements.
Measuring hematuria contaminates the S.G. cell, consequently producing incorrect results. The 
actual color of the macroscopic hematuria (about 10,000 red blood cells/μL) may not correspond 
with the result determined by the instrument. Measurement of dense turbid urine may produce 
incorrect S.G. results.
■ Samples containing ascorbic acid can affect measurement results.
Measuring samples with ascorbic acid can produce lower glucose and occult blood values than 
actual levels.
■ Drug-administered urine and visual hematuria can affect measurement results.
Measurements of drug-administered urine and visual hematuria can produce incorrect results. The 
instrument alerts you to the error by adding a “!” sign on the displayed and printed reports.





AX-4030
2-11
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  2.2.3    Handling Test Strips
REFERENCE: Purchase the test strips specified for the instrument because the strips are not 
supplied with the instrument. 
■ Use only test strips specified for the instrument.
“AUTION Sticks 9EB” are available for use with the instrument. Carefully read the package insert 
and observe the expiration date.
■ Check the test strips before use.
Do not use the test strips beyond the expiration date or test strips having discolored pad area even if 
they are within the expiration date.
■ Prepare the test strips just before testing.
Take as many test strips as you need out of the bottles and load them into the feeders just before 
testing. Each feeder can contain up to 200 test strips (equivalent to 2 bottles), but the quality of the 
strips is assured only for 3 days. Test strips absorb moisture in the air, which may alter their quality 
and produce incorrect results. The test strip bottles should be securely capped immediately after 
taking out the strips.
■ Do not touch the pad area on the test strips.
Touching the test strips can cause sebum to adhere to the surface, whereby producing incorrect 
results.
■ Correctly set the type of test strip to be used by key operation.
Before carrying out measurement, set the type of the test strip you are to use by key operation. An 
incorrect test strip setting can produce incorrect results. 





2-12
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

Preparation for Measurement2.3
This section describes the tasks you should carry out on a daily basis before testing samples, which 
include checking wastes and consumables, turning on the power, assigning the feeders to the item 
racks, and preparing test strips and samples.
REFERENCE: Purchase the test strips specified for the instrument because the strips are not 
supplied with the instrument. 
  2.3.1    Checking Wastes and Consumables
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard liquid waste, test strips, and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Check for used test strips.
1 Pull out the waste tray to check if there are any used 
test strips in it.
• Discard the used strips, if there are any.
• See “4.2.1 Cleaning the Waste Box” on page 4-3.
NOTE: Before pushing in the waste box, ensure 
the box is correctly sitting on the waste box tray. 
Incorrect installation of the waste box may cause 
test strips to be scattered inside the instrument or 
clog the test strip path.
NOTE: If test strips are scattered inside the 
instrument due to the waste box being detached, 
make sure the instrument is on standby, and 
remove the strips with tweezers. Wipe the location 
where the strips were present using a cloth 
moistened with alcohol. Then, install the waste 
box correctly. 
  2    Check for liquid waste.
1 Check if there is any liquid waste in the drain bottle.
• Discard the liquid waste, if there is any.
• See “4.2.2 Discarding Liquid Waste from the Drain 
Bottle” on page 4-5.

Waste box
Waste box tray

Drain bottle





AX-4030
2-13
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3    Check the washing solution.
1 Check the washing solution bottle to see if it 
contains a sufficient volume of solution.
• If the solution is getting low, discard the remaining 
solution, and transfer newly prepared solution to the 
bottle.
• See “4.3.1 Replacing the Washing Solution” on 
page 4-15.
  4    Check the thermal printer paper.
1 Check for two red lines appearing on both edges of 
the thermal printer paper.
• If red lines are found, replace the paper roll with a 
new one.
• See “4.3.2 Replacing the Thermal Printer Paper” 
on page 4-17.

Washing solution bottle

Thermal printer paper





2-14
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  2.3.2    Turning On the Power
1 Press the standby switch on the left side of the front 
panel.
• The standby switch will light green.
• The message “Please wait...” will appear for a 
maximum of 20 seconds, followed by the product 
name and program version for about 2 seconds.
NOTE: If the initial memory check detects a 
problem, the instrument will inform you of it by 
indicating an appropriate warning (W), error (E), 
or trouble (T) code before displaying the program 
version. For more information, see Chapter 5, 
“Troubleshooting”.
• The instrument will read the parameter settings, and 
then initialize the hardware.
• Warm-up will complete in 2 minutes and the 
standby screen shown at right will appear. You 
will see the current date and time, the initial 
measurement start number (0001), and the current 
test strip settings.

Standby
switch

Please wait...
          AX-4030    V1.00

  Startup
  
  
  Initializing...
  Please wait...

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  10:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
Standby screen





AX-4030
2-15
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
REFERENCE: Measurement-related parameters 
The instrument provides the parameters related to measurement operation listed below. 
Default settings have been made when shipped from the factory, and you can change the 
settings as you need. A list of current settings can be printed out from the printer (see “3.5.3 
Printing the Current Parameter Settings” on page 3-25). 
Parameters Descriptions Default Page(s)
Use of printer Enables or disables the built-in printer.
Use 3-18
Use of external output Enables or disables the external output. Not use
3-20
Result format Selects the result format for normal, STAT, and 
control measurements between “semiquantitative” 
and “reflectivity” respectively.
Semiquantitative 3-4
Measurement start 
number assignment
Determines whether sequential measurement 
numbers are assigned through batches, or the 
measurement number is reset at the beginning of 
each batch.
Continue from 
previous batch
3-6
Measurement number 
assignment
Determines whether measurement numbers 
are assigned to samples or to all of the ports 
regardless of whether the ports have samples or 
not.
Assign to 
samples
3-6





2-16
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  2.3.3    Loading Test Strips into the Feeders
On the standby screen, select the main feeder and the types of test strips to be used. Then, load the 
correct test strips into the feeders.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the test strips beyond the expiration date or test strips having 
a discolored pad area even if they are within the expiration date. Carefully read the 
package inserts of the test strips before use, and observe the instructions.
NOTE: Take as many test strips as you need out of the bottles and load them into the feeders 
just before testing. Each feeder can contain up to 200 test strips (equivalent to 2 bottles), but 
the quality of the strips is assured only for three days. Test strips absorb moisture in the air, 
which may alter their quality and produce incorrect results. The test strip bottles should be 
securely capped immediately after taking out the strips.
  1    Setting the test strips and main feeder by key operation.
Set the types of test strips to be loaded into the feeders, and select the main feeder between feeder 1 
or 2. 
REFERENCE: When to select the “main feeder” 
You can select either feeder 1 or 2 as the main feeder usually. However, you should explicitly 
specify the main feeder to use the sample racks listed below. These racks always use the test 
strips in the feeder specified as the main feeder.
   ■ Start rack
   ■ Normal racks (optional)
   ■ Item racks whose rack IDs are set to [ ] on the [Rack assignment for test strip] screen.
1 On the standby screen, check the current settings 
for the type of test strips and the main feeder (in 
light blue background).
• If you use the current settings, go to step  2  .
2 To change the settings, press  Strip    .
• The [Test strip setup] screen will appear.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  10:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
Type of test strips
Main feeder (light blue background)





AX-4030
2-17
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
3 Below [Test strips in feeder 1] and [Test strips in 
feeder 2], select the type of test strips to be loaded 
into each feeder. 
• Press the hyphen key to change the options.
• Press   to move the cursor down.
4 Below [Main feeder], select the feeder you want to 
use as the main feeder.
• Press the hyphen key to switch between feeders 1 
and 2.
5 Press    OK    .
• A message window will open to ask if you want to 
save your settings.
6 Press    OK    to save your changes.
• The standby screen will appear with the new 
settings displayed.
REFERENCE: Press  Cancel  to abort your changes 
and return to the standby screen.
IMPORTANT: Keep the instrument on while 
saving the settings.
  2    Attach a desiccant bag to the feeder cover.
1 Turn the locking lever (a) to unlock the feeder 
cover, and open the cover (b).

  Test strip setup
  
  
  Test strips in feeder 1
  [9EB ]
  Test strips in feeder 2
  [9EB ]
  Main feeder
  [1]
  
  
  
  
                       OK      Cancel

  
                       OK      Cancel

  Test strip setup
  
  
  Test strips in feeder 1
  [10EA]
  Test strips in feeder 2
  [9UB ]
  Main feeder
  [1]
  
  
  
  
             OK                Cancel
  Save setting changes?

Open
Close
(a)
(b)





2-18
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

2 Tilt the side panel of the storage section in the 
direction of the arrow.
3 Take out a desiccant bag from the test strip bottle 
and attach it to the feeder cover.
• For loading 100 test strips, attach a desiccant bag on 
the side panel of the storage section. If loading 200 
test strips, attach one bag on the back of the cover, 
and another bag on the side panel of the storage 
section.
4 Place the side panel as before.
REFERENCE: Replace the desiccant bags on 
the feeders each time a new test strip bottle is 
opened.
  3    Load the test strips into the feeders.
1 Take out as many test strips as you need from the 
bottle, and load them into the feeder.
• Level test strips into even piles. 
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the pad area on 
the test strips. Contact can cause sebum to 
adhere to the surface, whereby producing 
incorrect results.
NOTE: Place the test strips with the black marker to 
the back side of the feeder (see the figure at right).
2 Close the feeder cover and turn the locking lever clockwise to lock it.
3 Cap the test strip bottle.
IMPORTANT: Without desiccant bags, the test 
strips can absorb moisture in the air. Cap the 
bottle securely to avoid deterioration of the 
strips.

Desiccant bag
(When loading 
200 strips)
Desiccant bag
(Always required)
Tilt side panel of 
storage section.
2





AX-4030
2-19
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2.3.4    Assigning the Type of Test Strips to the Item Racks
Assign a feeder (1, 2, or main) to each item rack (rack ID #01 to #10) used for normal 
measurement. This allows the instrument to automatically eject appropriate test strips from the 
assigned feeder for measuring samples in the item rack. For example, you can set it so that samples 
in the rack #01 are measured with the test strips in feeder 1. Make correct settings to successfully 
use the item racks. For more information about the item racks, see “Sample Racks” in “2.1.4 
Sample Containers and Sample Racks” on page 2-7.
NOTE: In the following procedure, what you actually assign to the item racks are feeders (1, 2, 
or main), not the type of test strips. If you want to change the type of test strips to load into the 
feeder, see the instructions in step  1  in “2.3.3 Loading Test Strips into the Feeders” on page 
2-16.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 1 to go to the [Parameter settings] screen.
3 Press 1 to go to the [Rack assignment for test strip] 
screen.

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  10:10
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Parameter settings
  (1000)             2006-01-09  10:10
  1 Rack assignment for test strip
  2 Results display format
  3 Measurement No. setup





2-20
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  2    Assign the types of test strips to rack IDs.
1 Choose a rack ID, from #01 to #10.
• To move the cursor down, press   .
• To move the cursor up, press   .
2 Choose a feeder number.
• To change options, press the hyphen key.
• Samples in the item racks will be measured with the 
test strips in the feeder specified here.
• [ ] represents the main feeder.
REFERENCE:  You can select one among feeder 1, feeder 2, or the main feeder ( ) for each 
item rack. The type of test strips shown at the right of the feeder number is the one specified in 
step  1  in “2.3.3 Loading Test Strips into the Feeders” on page 2-16. The test strips and main 
feeder settings cannot be changed here. 
3 Press    OK    .
• You will be asked to save the changes.
  3    Save the changes.
1 Press    OK    to save the changes and return to the 
[Parameter settings] screen.
NOTE: Keep the power on while saving the 
settings.
2 Press Go back  twice to go back to the standby 
screen.

  Rack assignment for test strip
  (1100)             2006-01-09  10:12
    #01 [  ×   ]
    #02 [  ×   ]
    #03 [1:9EB ]
    #04 [1:9EB ]
    #05 [1:9EB ]
    #06 [1:9EB ]
    #07 [2:9EB ]
    #08 [2:9EB ]
    #09 [2:9EB ]
    #10 [2:9EB ]
                       OK      Cancel

Rack ID Feeder No. (selectable here) Test strips set for the feeder
#01 [1:9EB ]

  Rack assignment for test strip
  (1100)             2006-01-09  10:12
    #01 [  ×   ]
    #02 [  ×   ]
    #03 [1:9EB ]
    #04 [1:9EB ]
    #05 [1:9EB ]
    #06 [1:9EB ]
    #07 [2:9EB ]
    #08 [2:9EB ]
    #09 [2:9EB ]
    #10 [2:9EB ]
                       OK      Cancel

  Rack assignment for test strip
  (1100)             2006-01-09  10:12
    #01 [1:9EB ]
    #02 [2:9EB ]
    #03 [1:9EB ]
    #04 [1:9EB ]
    #05 [1:9EB ]
    #06 [1:9EB ]
  
  Save setting changes?
             OK                Cancel
  Save setting changes?





AX-4030
2-21
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2.3.5    Preparing Samples
Transfer samples into sample tubes, load the tubes into the sample racks, and place the sample 
racks in the sampler of the instrument. See “2.2.2 Handling Samples” on page 2-10 to learn 
precautions on samples.
Prepare: Sample tubes, item racks, and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
  1    Prepare sample tubes.
1 Prepare the sample tubes that comply with the 
standards shown at right.
REFERENCE: To have the built-in barcode reader 
read barcodes successfully, label the tubes as 
shown at right.
  2    Pour samples into sample tubes.
1 Fill a sample tube with at least 2 mL of sample. 
Ensure the sample level is at least 40 mm above the 
bottom of the tube.
IMPORTANT: An insufficient volume of sample 
may produce incorrect results.

105 mm
15.8 mm

Min. 30 mm
Min. 5 mm

Min. 2 mL
Min. 40 mm





2-22
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  3    Load the sample tubes into the sample racks.
1 Place the sample tubes into the ports of the item 
rack.
• Use an item rack (rack ID #01 to #10) assigned to 
the feeder that contains the test strips to be used for 
measurement.
• Optional normal racks can also be used as an 
alternative.
NOTE: If the rack transportation method is set to 
“loop”, load the first 10 samples into the start rack. 
Starting a batch with another type of rack may 
cause double measurement on samples. See page 2-6.
NOTE: Fit the bottom of the sample tubes into the 
recessed portion of the rubber cushions so that 
the tubes stand straight. Placing tubes out of 
position may cause sample aspiration to fail and 
could even damage the nozzle.
REFERENCE: To have the built-in barcode reader 
read barcodes successfully, labels on the tubes 
must be facing to the rear side of the sample rack.
  4    Load the sample racks into the sampler.
1 Hold the sample rack with the marker facing you 
and place it on the loading side of the sampler.
• First, place the rack at the frontward of the loading 
side, fit the recesses at the lower right of the rack 
into the guides inside the sampler, and slide the rack 
backward.
• The loading side can contain up to 5 racks.
REFERENCE: When the rack transportation 
method is set to “loop”, place the start rack at the 
beginning. The unloading side of the sampler can 
also be used to load racks (up to 5 racks). See page 2-6.
NOTE: If a sample spills on the sampler, immediately wipe it off. A crystallized sample may 
hinder smooth transportation of the sample racks, and consequently cause trouble.

Gray adapters
Item rack

Rubber 
cushions
Sample tubes

Barcode label
Rear of sample rack

Marker





AX-4030
2-23
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
F
Measurement Operations2.4
This section gives instructions for measuring samples continuously (normal measurement), and 
measuring higher priority samples (port/rack STAT measurement).
  2.4.1    Normal Measurement: Measuring Samples Continuously 
Prepare: Item racks or optional normal racks, sample tubes, and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
   Safety devices may trip and automatically stop operation of the instrument 
if the front cover, maintenance cover, feeder protective cover, or side 
cover is opened. Do not open the covers unless required. In the case 
of an automatic stop, some aspirated samples may not be measured 
successfully. Check the printed results reports thoroughly, and test the 
samples again if necessary.
  1    Perform S.G. calibration.
Calibrate the instrument using low and high specific gravity standard solutions once a month. For 
instructions, see “2.5 S.G. Calibration” on page 2-34.
  2    Load test strips into the feeders.
1 Load the test strips into the feeders.
• See “2.3.3 Loading Test Strips into the Feeders” on page 2-16.
  3    Check the settings of the test strips and feeders.
1 On the standby screen, check if the settings of 
the test strips and main feeder are correct.
• To change the settings, see step  1  in “2.3.3 
Loading Test Strips into the Feeders” on page 
2-16.
• For information on the main feeder, see 
“REFERENCE: When to select the main feeder” 
on page 2-16.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  11:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
Type of test strips
Main feeder (light blue background)





2-24
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B

  4    Set the measurement start number.
For information on the measurement start number, see “Measurement number” in “2.1.3 
Measurement Terminology” on page 2-4.
1 On the standby screen, check the measurement start 
number.
• To use the current number, skip to step  5  .
2 To set a new number, press Meas No. .
• The [Measurement start No.] screen will appear.
3 Below [Normal measurement], enter a number from 
0000 to 9999, using the numeric keys (0 to 9).
REFERENCE:  For example, to enter “0150”, 
press 0, 1, 5, and 0 in that order. To correct the 
number, press    BS    to delete the digits one by 
one, and enter a new number.
REFERENCE: If the cursor is placed below [Control 
measurement], press   to move up to the 
[Normal measurement] entry field.
4 Press    OK    to save your changes.
• The standby screen will appear again with a new 
measurement start number.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  11:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Measurement start No.
  Normal measurement
  <0150>
  Control measurement
  <0001>
  
  
             BS        OK      Cancel

  
             BS        OK      Cancel

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  11:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0150
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal





AX-4030
2-25
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  5    Prepare samples.
1 Pour samples into sample tubes and load them into the sampler.
• See “2.3.5 Preparing Samples” on page 2-21.
  6    Start the normal measurement.
1 Press   to start.
• The first sample rack will be transported to the 
aspiration position while “Waiting for rack…” is 
displayed.
• The nozzle will come down to aspirate the 
sample from the first sample tube, and then the 
measurement operation will take place.
• When the result of the sample is obtained, it is 
reported on a printout. See “2.8.2 Printed Results 
Report” on page 2-50.
• The following samples are processed in the same 
way.
   Do not touch the sample rack being grabbed at the rear of the sampler. The 
rack can move suddenly, which is very dangerous. When adding sample 
racks to the sampler during measurement, keep hands away from the rack 
at the rear and place new racks at the front.
   The test strip storage section may be driving while measurement is in 
progress. Do not touch inside the storage section directly with hands when 
adding test strips in the feeder. Contact with the drive mechanism may 
cause injury.
REFERENCE: To add test strips during measurement 
Open the feeder cover. You will see “W006: Close the feeder cover.” on the screen. Add new 
test strips in the feeder, close the cover, and then press    OK    to clear the warning.

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:15
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0150
  ID
                 ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
  
                      Stop
           Waiting for rack...

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:15
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0150
  ID
                 ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
  
Results               Stop





2-26
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
F
REFERENCE: To view results 
Press Results   to view the latest result. Pressing 
<<<<<<<< or >>>>>>>> can view the previous or next 
result.  To return to the [Measuring...] screen, 
press Go back  .
REFERENCE: To suspend measurement in 
progress 
Press   Stop   or   . The instrument will 
display “Suspended”, and stop the measurement 
operation. You can resume the operation by 
pressing  Start   within a minute. If more than 
1 minute elapses, the instrument will proceed 
with end process and can no longer resume the 
suspended operation. Depending on the timing 
the stop key is pressed, some already-aspirated 
samples may not be measured successfully. View 
the printed reports to check if correct results are 
obtained.
  7    When measurements of all samples are completed…
• The message “Measurement operations ending” 
will appear after the entire batch of samples has 
been measured. The instrument will proceed with 
flow line flushing and other end processes.
• When the end processes are completed, the standby 
screen will appear again.
1 Take out the sample racks from the sampler.
  8    At the end of the day…
1 Take the test strips out of the feeder, and put them 
back in the bottle.
2 Dispose of liquid waste and used test strips.
• See “4.2.1 Cleaning the Waste Box” on page 4-3, 
and “4.2.2 Discarding Liquid Waste from the Drain 
Bottle” on page 4-5.
3 Press the standby switch to power off.

  View
  Date 2006-01-09 11:16 Kind NORMAL
  No. 0150 Po. 001-05 Strip 1: 9EB
  ID 000000000000000000
   GLU  -            *PRO  4+
   BIL  -             URO  NORMAL
   PH   7.0          !BLD  +-
  *KET  4+            NIT  -
   LEU  -      
   TURB -             S.G. 1.000
  COLOR LIGHT YELLOW
          <<<<<<<<  >>>>>>>>  Go back

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:20
  Port No.
                                0021
  Measurement No.
                                0010
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
                     Start
              Suspended

  Measurement operations ending.
  Please wait...…





AX-4030
2-27
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2.4.2    Port STAT Measurement: Measuring a Higher Priority Sample
Port STAT measurement is for measuring a single sample loaded into the STAT port located at the 
center of the sampler. You may use the STAT port when you have only one sample to measure, or 
when you are asked to measure a new sample urgently while normal measurement is in progress. 
If you want to interrupt normal measurement to quickly measure additional two or more samples, 
use rack STAT measurement (see “2.4.3 Rack STAT Measurement: Measuring Higher Priority 
Samples” on page 2-31).
Prepare: Sample tube and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Prepare a sample for STAT measurement.
1 Pour the sample for STAT measurement in a sample tube.
• See “2.3.5 Preparing Samples” on page 2-21.
  2    Load the sample tube into the STAT port.
1 Place the sample tube straight into the STAT port.
2 While pressing the “PUSH” mark, slide the STAT 
port backward and push it in place.
3 Gently pull the STAT port toward you to ensure the 
port is locked.

PUSH
STAT port
Sample





2-28
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B

  3    Switch to the port STAT measurement mode. 
1 During normal measurement or on standby, press   to go to the [STAT reservation] screen.
2 Below [Sample feeding], choose [Use port].
• Press the hyphen key to switch between  
[Use port] and [Use rack].
3 Press    OK    .
• The next [STAT reservation] screen will appear.
  4    Set the measurement parameters.
1 Set the parameters for port STAT measurement.
• See the table below.
• To move the cursor downward, press   .
Items Descriptions
Test strip Select the feeder to use for STAT measurement. Press the 
hyphen key to change the 
feeder number. At the right of the feeder number, the type of test strips currently set for 
the feeder is shown.
Measurement 
No.
Enter the measurement number for the sample. For example, to enter “0200”, press 
0, 2, 
0, 0 in that order.
ID Enter the ID for the sample. An ID can be up to 18 digits long and can contain numbers, 
alphabet, and special characters. For more information, see 
“ID” in “1.7.3 Menu 
Operations and Examples” on page 1-45. The optional hand-held barcode reader can also 
be used to read the ID from the barcode labeled on the sample tube.
2 Press    OK    .

  STAT reservation
  Sample feeding
  [Use port                          ]
                       OK      Cancel

  STAT reservation
  
  Use port
  
  Test strip
  [1: 9EB]
  Measurement No.
  <0001>
  ID
  <------------------>
  Place sample in STAT port.
  
  
                       OK      Cancel

  STAT reservation
  
  Use port
  
  Test strip
  [1:10EA]
  Measurement No.
  <0001>
  ID
  <------------------>
  Place sample in STAT port.
  
  
                       OK      Cancel





AX-4030
2-29
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  5    Start the port STAT measurement.
How the STAT measurement takes place depends on 
the status of the instrument when   is pressed in 
step  3 .
If the instrument is on standby:
1 Check the settings on the [STAT reservation] screen, 
and press  Start   to start measurement.
REFERENCE: Warning “W002” occurs with a beep 
if the STAT port is out of the sample aspirating 
position. Place the sample correctly and  
press    OK    .
If measurement is underway:
• “STAT reserved” will appear and the STAT 
measurement icon will blink to indicate STAT 
measurement has been reserved.
   Keep hands away from the STAT 
port while the STAT measurement 
icon is blinking. The aspirating 
nozzle may descend into the STAT 
port.
• Port STAT measurement will automatically start 
when aspiration of the normal measurement sample 
in process is completed.
REFERENCE: The following keys are operational 
during STAT measurement.
■ Press   Stop   to stop STAT measurement. 
Normal measurement also stops if it was running.
■ Press results  to view the latest result. Pressing 
<<<<<<<< or >>>>>>>> can view the previous or next 
result. To return to the [Measuring…] screen, 
press Go back  .
■ Press   to make another reservation for STAT measurement.

  STAT reservation
  Use port
  
  Test strip
                              1: 9EB
  Measurement No.
                                0002
  ID
                    060108-001-00248
                     Start     Cancel

On standby
During normal measurement

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:35
  Port No.
                                0020
  Measurement No.
                                0020
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
                      Stop
            STAT reserved
STAT measurement icon blinks.

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:36
  Port No.
                                STAT
  Measurement No.
                                0002
  ID
                    060108-001-00248
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
Results               Stop





2-30
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  6    When port STAT measurement is completed…
• The result of the STAT measurement will be printed.
• The instrument will then operate in a different way depending on the status before performing 
STAT measurement.
  If the instrument was on standby: 
   The display will show “
Measurement operations ending”, the flow lines will be flushed, and 
then the instrument will put itself on standby.
  If measurement was underway:
  The suspended normal measurement will resume.
1 Press the “PUSH” mark on the STAT port 
backward to unlock the stopper, and then slide the 
port toward you.
2 Take the sample tube out of the STAT port.

2
1
PUSH





AX-4030
2-31
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  2.4.3    Rack STAT Measurement: Measuring Higher Priority Samples
Rack STAT measurement allows you to have up to 7 samples measured prior to the samples 
waiting for normal measurement in the sampler. This is accomplished by loading the higher priority 
samples into the STAT and control rack and placing the rack between the sample racks currently 
loaded in the sampler. Rack STAT measurement can also be carried out during standby. 
Prepare: STAT and control rack, sample tubes, and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Prepare samples for STAT measurement.
1 Pour samples for STAT measurement in sample 
tubes.
• See “2.3.5 Preparing Samples” on page 2-21.
2 Place the sample tubes straight into ports 1 to 7 with 
the orange adapters of the STAT and control rack.
REFERENCE: Leave ports 8 to 10 with the dark 
blue adapters empty as they are for control 
measurement.

Orange adapters
Keep empty.
STAT and control rack
Black label





2-32
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  2    Set the measurement parameters.
If you use the test strips in the main feeder, skip this step and go to step  3 . The main feeder is 
indicated by a light blue background on the standby screen.
1 To use the test strips in the non-main feeder, press   to go to the [STAT reservation] screen.
2 Below [Sample feeding], choose [Use rack] and 
press    OK    to go to the next screen.
3 Below [Test strip], select the feeder that contains the 
test strips to use.  
Below [Measurement No.], select the measurement 
start number for STAT measurement.
• For instructions, see step  4  in “2.4.2 Port STAT 
Measurement: Measuring a Higher Priority 
Sample” on page 2-27.
4 Press    OK    .
  3    Load the STAT and control rack into the sampler.
1 Place the STAT and control rack on the loading side 
of the sampler.
• If there are some racks waiting for normal 
measurement on the loading side, keep the rack at 
the aspirating position (furthest from you) as it is 
and slide the other racks toward you to make room 
for the STAT and control rack.
• If the loading side is full with racks, remove one of 
them and insert the STAT and control rack.
   During normal measurement, the aspirating nozzle descends into the ports 
of the rack located furthest from you. For your safety, do not move the rack 
in the process of aspiration.
NOTE: If samples spill on the sampler, immediately wipe them off. Crystallized samples may 
hinder smooth transportation of the sample racks, and consequently cause trouble.

  STAT reservation
  Sample feeding
  [Use rack                          ]

  STAT reservation
  Use rack
  Test strip
  [1: 9EB]
  Measurement No.
  <0001>
                       OK      Cancel

Rack in aspirating
STAT and control rack





AX-4030
2-33
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  4    Start the rack STAT measurement.
How the STAT measurement takes place depends on the status of the instrument.
If the instrument is on standby:
1 Press   to measure the samples in the STAT and 
control rack.
• Samples are processed in the same way as those for 
normal measurement.
If measurement is underway:
• STAT measurement will start when the STAT and 
control rack reaches the sample aspirating position. 
Samples are processed in the same way as those for 
normal measurement.
  5    When rack STAT measurement is completed…
• When the sample aspiration of the STAT and control rack is completed, the rack will be 
discharged to the unloading side of the sampler.
1 When aspiration of the remaining normal measurement samples is completed, take the sample 
racks out of the sampler.

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:45
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0002
  ID
                    060108-001-00248
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
Results               Stop





2-34
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
F
S.G. Calibration2.5
Perform S.G. calibration of the instrument once a month using low and high S.G. standard solutions 
and a urinometer. Please ensure the urinometer conforms to the Brix – S.G. conversion formula 
described in “1.1.4 Measurement Principle” on page 1-7.
  2.5.1    Preparing S.G. Standard Solutions
Prepare:  Saccharose, purified water, urinometer, two sample tubes,  
sample rack (item rack, STAT and control rack, start rack, or normal rack)
IMPORTANT: Use S.G. standard solutions that meet the following requirements unless 
preparing the solutions in steps  1  and  2  . 
• Specific gravity readings are between 1.000 to 1.050. 
• Difference between the S.G. readings of the high and low solutions is 0.03 or higher.
IMPORTANT: Prepare the S.G. standard solutions just before carrying out calibration. Use 
of solutions stored for a long period of time may produce incorrect calibration results.
  1    Prepare a low solution.
Use purified water as a low solution.
1 Transfer at least 2 mL of purified water into a 
sample tube. Ensure the water level is at least 40 
mm above the bottom of the tube.
IMPORTANT: An insufficient amount of low 
solution may cause incorrect calibration 
results.
  2    Prepare a high solution.
1 Add purified water to 9.3 g of saccharose to make 100 mL of high solution.
  3    Take specific gravity readings.
1 Use the urinometer* to accurately measure the S.G. values of the low and high solutions, and 
record the values.
*  The urinometer should conform to the Brix – S.G. conversion formula described in “1.1.4 Measurement Principle” 
on page 1-7. When the high solution prepared in step 2 is measured using the urinometer, the S. G. value should be 
1.040.

Min. 2 mL 
purified water
Low solution
Min. 
40 mm





AX-4030
2-35
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4    Load the S.G. solutions into the sample rack.
1 Transfer at least 2 mL of high solution into a sample 
tube. Ensure the liquid level is at least 40 mm above 
the bottom of the tube.
IMPORTANT: An insufficient amount of high 
solution may cause incorrect calibration 
results.
2 Place the low solution tube into port 1 of the sample 
rack, and the high solution tube into port 2.
IMPORTANT: Load the two solutions into the 
correct ports respectively. Loading them into 
the wrong ports may cause an error.
  5    Load the sample rack into the sampler.
1 Hold the sample rack with the marker facing you 
and place it on the loading side of the sampler.
• First, place the rack at the frontward of the loading 
side, fit the recesses at the lower right of the rack 
into the guides inside the sampler, and slide the rack 
backward.
NOTE: If solution spills on the sampler, immediately 
wipe it off. Crystallized solutions may hinder 
smooth transportation of the sample racks, and 
consequently cause trouble.

Min. 2 mL water
High solution
Min. 40 mm

Port 1: low solution
Port 2: high solution

Marker





2-36
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  2.5.2    Starting S.G. Calibration
  1    Access the S.G. calibration parameters.
1 On the standby screen, press S.G. Cal to go to the 
[S.G. calibration] screen.
  2    Set the obtained standard S.G. values.
Prepare the notes you took in step  3  in “2.5.1 Preparing S.G. Standard Solutions” on page 2-34.
1 Below [Standard solution (Low)], enter the S.G. 
value of the low solution.
• Use the numeric keys (0 to 9).
• The S.G. value acceptable here is between 1.000 to 
1.050.
REFERENCE: For example, to enter “1.030”, 
press 1, 0, 3, 0 in that order. A decimal point is 
automatically added. To correct the entry, press  
   BS    to delete the digits one by one, and enter 
a new value.
2 Press   to proceed to the [Standard solution 
(High)] entry field.
3 Below [Standard solution (High)], enter the S.G. 
value of the high solution.
• Use the numeric keys (0 to 9).
• The S.G. value acceptable here is between 1.000 to 
1.050.
4 Press    OK    to save your entries.
• The next [S.G. Calibration] screen will appear.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  10:30
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  S.G. Calibration
  Standard solution (Low)
  <1.000>
  Standard solution (High)
  <1.040>
  
  
  
  
             BS        OK      Cancel

  S.G. Calibration
  Standard solution (Low)
  <1.002>
  Standard solution (High)
  <1.040>
  
  
  
  
             BS        OK      Cancel





AX-4030
2-37
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3    Start the S.G. calibration.
1 Make sure the sample rack with the S.G. standard 
solutions are correctly loaded into the sampler.
2 Press  Start   to start calibration.
• Measurement of the standard solutions will take 
place when the sample rack reaches the aspirating 
position.
REFERENCE: To stop calibration in progress, 
press   Stop   . The instrument will wait until the 
solution measurement in progress completes and 
then proceeds to the breaking process before 
putting itself back on standby. Note that breaking 
calibration aborts all of the calibration results.
  4    When S.G. calibration is completed…
• The message “Measurement completed” will 
appear. 
1 Press Go back  to return to the standby screen.
2 Remove the sample rack of the standard solutions 
from the sampler.
REFERENCE: If the error “E120” occurs  
See “E120” in “5.2.2 Causes and Remedies” on page 5-8 to determine the cause of the error, 
and retry from step  1  . If the error persists, there is something wrong with the instrument. 
Contact your distributor.

  S.G. calibration
  Prepare S.G. standard solutions.
                     Start    Go back

  S.G. calibration
                     2006-01-09  10:35
Measuring...
  Please wait...

  S.G. calibration
                     2006-01-09  10:37
Measurement completed.
Please wait...
                              Go back





2-38
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
C
Control Measurement2.6
Perform control measurement at regular intervals so as to maintain the status of the instrument and 
measurement quality. Up to 3 types or concentrations of controls can be measured by loading them 
into the STAT and control rack (control measurement can be performed using at least one control, 
and does not always require three different controls). Up to 200 control measurement results can be 
stored in memory.
Prepare:  Commercially available controls, STAT and control rack, sample tubes, 
 
and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used controls, test strips, and protective gloves in accordance 
with local regulations for biohazardous waste.
REFERENCE: This section describes how to perform control measurement when on standby. 
However, controls can also be measured before or in course of normal measurement by 
inserting the STAT and control rack at the beginning of or between the racks containing patient 
samples.
REFERENCE: For the controls labeled with barcodes, “control IDs” read from the barcodes are 
automatically assigned to the corresponding control measurement results.
  1    Check the main feeder.
The test strips in the main feeder are always used for control measurement.
1 On the standby screen, check if the main feeder 
and the test strips for the feeder are set as you 
desire.
• The main feeder is indicated by a light blue 
background.
  2    Load the test strips into the main feeder.
1 Place the test strips in the main feeder.
• Any types of test strips can be used as long as they are supported by the instrument.
• For detailed instructions, see “2.3.3 Loading Test Strips into the Feeders” on page 2-16. The 
main feeder and test strips settings can be changed in step  1  in that section.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  13:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0001
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal
Type of test strips
Main feeder (light blue background)





AX-4030
2-39
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  3    Prepare controls.
IMPORTANT: Read through the package inserts 
before using the controls.
1 Transfer at least 2 mL of control into a sample tube. 
Ensure the liquid level is at least 40 mm above the 
bottom of the tube.
IMPORTANT: An insufficient amount of controls 
may produce incorrect results.
REFERENCE: To have the built-in barcode reader 
read barcodes successfully, label the tubes as 
shown in the figure.
  4    Load the controls into the STAT and control rack
1 Insert the sample tubes into ports 8, 9, and 10 (with 
dark blue adapters) in that order.
  Port 8:  Low density control 
 L  
  Port 9:  Middle density control 
 M 
  Port 10: High density control  H 
REFERENCE: Do not place the controls in ports 
1 to 7 with the orange adapters, as they are 
dedicated to rack STAT measurement.
REFERENCE: To have the built-in barcode reader 
read barcodes successfully, labels on the tubes 
must be facing to the rear side of the sample rack.

Min. 2 mL of control
Min. 40 mm

Min. 30 mm
Min. 5 mm

Black label
Dark blue 
adapters
STAT and control rack
Keep empty.
H
L
M

Barcode label
Rear of STAT and control rack





2-40
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  5    Load the STAT and control rack into the sampler.
1 Hold the sample rack with the marker facing you 
and place it on the loading side of the sampler.
• First, place the rack at the frontward of the loading 
side, fit the recesses at the lower right of the rack 
into the guides inside the sampler, and slide the rack 
backward.
NOTE: If a control spills on the sampler, immediately wipe it off. A crystallized control may hinder 
smooth transportation of the sample racks, and consequently cause trouble.
  6    Set the measurement start number.
1 On the standby screen, press Meas No. to go to the 
[Measurement start No.] screen.
2 Press   to move down to [Control measurement].
3 Enter a number between 0000 to 9999 to be 
assigned to the first control.
• Use the numeric keys (0 to 9).
REFERENCE:  For example, to enter “0150”, 
press 0, 1, 5, and 0 in that order. To correct the 
number, press    BS    to delete digits one by 
one, and enter a new number.
4 Press    OK    to save your changes.
• The standby screen will appear again with a new 
measurement start number. 

Marker

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Measurement start No.
  Normal measurement
  <0001>
  Control measurement
  <0001>
  
  
             BS        OK      Cancel

  
             BS        OK      Cancel

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  13:15
  Measurement start No.
                                0150
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1:10EA
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9UB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal





AX-4030
2-41
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  7    Measure the controls.
1 Press   to start.
• The STAT and control rack will be transported to 
the aspirating position while “Waiting for rack…” is 
displayed.
• The nozzle will come down to aspirate the first 
control, and then the measurement operation takes 
place.
• When the result is obtained, it will be printed. See 
“2.8.2 Printed Results Report” on page 2-50.
• The following controls are processed in the same 
way.
REFERENCE: To view results 
Press Results  to view the latest result. Pressing 
<<<<<<<< or >>>>>>>> can display the previous or 
next result. To return to the [Measuring…] screen, 
press Go back  .
REFERENCE: To stop control measurement in 
progress, press   Stop   . The instrument will 
perform the breaking process and put itself on 
standby.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  13:15
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0150
  ID
                 ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
  
                      Stop
           Waiting for rack...

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  13:17
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0150
  ID
                 ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
  
Results               Stop

  View
  Date 2006-01-09 13:17 Kind CONTROL
  No. 0001 Po. 001-05 Strip 1: 9EB
  ID 000000000000000000
   GLU  -            *PRO  4+
   BIL  -             URO  NORMAL
   PH   7.0          !BLD  +-
  *KET  4+            NIT  -
   LEU  -      
   TURB -             S.G. 1.000
  COLOR LIGHT YELLOW
          <<<<<<<<  >>>>>>>>  Go back





2-42
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  8    When control measurement is completed…
• The STAT and control rack will be discharged to the unloading side of the sampler.
REFERENCE: In the case that control measurement was carried out at the beginning or in 
course of normal measurement, normal measurement will start or resume at this point.
1 Remove the STAT and control rack from the sampler.





AX-4030
2-43
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
Check Measurement2.7
If you suspect obtained results are inadequate, use the supplied check strips to examine the status of 
the instrument. The check strip container holds two gray strips and two white strips. Use a pair of 
white and gray strips for check measurement at a time.
Prepare:  Gray and white check strips (one for each color), blower brush, alcohol, cloth, 
 
tissue paper, and protective gloves.
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard cleaning tools and used protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the pad area on the check strips. Use of strips contaminated 
by sebum can produce incorrect results.
NOTE: Ensure you have the check strips that came with the instrument. Measuring other test 
strips in the check measurement mode can cause trouble or damage to the instrument.
  1    Clean the test strip transportation path.
1 If the instrument is powered on, make sure the 
standby screen is displayed. Then, press the standby 
switch to turn off the power.
2 Clean the components listed below.
  Feeders:  See page 4-6.
  Introduction tray:  See page 4-12.
  Transport tray:  See page 4-19.
  Waste box:  See page 4-3.
NOTE: Without cleaning these parts before check measurement, the check strips may be 
contaminated and become unusable.
NOTE: After taking the test strips out of the feeders for cleaning, wrap the strips with tissue 
paper to protect from dust.

Standby
switch





2-44
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  2    Select the type of measurement.
1 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• Allow the instrument to warm up for about 2 
minutes until it puts itself on standby.
2 Press   Menu   to go to the [Main menu] screen.
3 Press 5 to go to the [Maintenance] screen.
4 Press 3 to go to the [Check measurement] screen.
  3    Select the feeder for the first check strip (white strip).
1 Select the feeder to load the first white check strip.
• Press the hyphen key to switch between feeders 1 
and 2.
2 Press    OK    .
• You will be asked to load the check strip.

  Ready for measurement
                     2006-01-09  14:00
  Measurement start No.
                                0250
  Test strips in feeder 1          
                              1: 9EB
  Test strips in feeder 2
                              2: 9EB
  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  14:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Maintenance
  (5000)             2006-01-09  14:00
  1 S.G. cell washout
  2 Clean washing bath and tray
  3 Check measurement
  4 Maintenance information

  Check measurement
  (5300)             2006-01-09  14:00
  Feeder No.
  [1]
                       OK     Go back





AX-4030
2-45
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  4    Prepare a white check strip.
1 Take a white check strip out of the container.
• Keep the container handy for reference to the 
reflectivity after measurement.
  5    Measure the first check strip (white).
1 Open the cover of the feeder selected in  3  .
• Turn the locking lever of the feeder 
counterclockwise to open the feeder.
2 Make sure the loading slot is visible.
3 Place the first check strip (white strip) in the loading 
slot.
NOTE: Hold the test strip with the black marker to 
the rear of the feeder and facing down. Put the 
whole strip down on the loading slot. Incorrect 
loading may cause trouble to occur.
4 Press  Start   .
• Check measurement will start.
REFERENCE: To stop check measurement in 
progress, press   Stop   . The instrument will 
proceed to the breaking process before putting 
itself back on standby.

White check strip
Reflectivity label

Loading slot
Black marker
Pad area facing down
White check strip

  Check measurement
  (5300)             2006-01-09  14:10
  Set check strip.
                     Start    Go back

  Check measurement
  (5300)             2006-01-09  14:10
  Measuring...
  Please wait...





2-46
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

• When check measurement is completed, the 
obtained result will be reported on the screen.
5 Press  Print   to print the result.
6 Press Go back  to return to the [Maintenance] screen.
  6    Measure the second test strip (gray strip).
1 Press 3 to go to the [Check measurement] screen.
2 Select the same feeder as the one for the first strip.
• For detailed instructions, see step  3  .
3 Take a gray test strip out of the container.
4 Load the gray test strip into the feeder selected in 
step 2.
• For detailed instructions, see step  5  .

  Check measurement
  (5300)             2006-01-09  14:11
  Measurement completed.
  ***** 2006-01-09 14:10 ****
        430[nm]    89.3 %
        500[nm]    93.1 %
        565[nm]    88.5 %
        635[nm]     9.7 %
        760[nm]   100.0 %
           Print              Go back
ReflectivityWavelengths

  Maintenance
  (5000)             2006-01-09  14:15
  1 S.G. cell washout
  2 Clean washing bath and tray
  3 Check measurement
  4 Maintenance information

  Check measurement
  (5300)             2006-01-09  14:15
  Feeder No.
  [1]
                       OK     Go back

Gray check strip

Loading slot
Black marker
Black marker facing down
Gray check strip





AX-4030
2-47
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
5 Press  Start   to start check measurement.
• When check measurement is completed, the 
obtained result will be reported on the screen.
6 Press  Print   to print the result.
  7    Evaluate the check measurement results.
1 Check the two printed result reports to see if the obtained reflectivity of each wavelength falls 
within the range listed on the container label.
REFERENCE: For information on the result reports of check measurement, see “2.8.6 Check 
Measurement Result Report” on page 2-56.
  When the results are: 
  Within range
  The instrument is working normally. Go to step 
 9  .
  Out of range
   Either the instrument or the test strips are abnormal. Perform a check measurement again. Press 
Go back  to return to the [Maintenance] screen. Take the remaining two check strips out of the 
container, and repeat from step  2  - 4 on page 2-44. Go to step  8  when completed.
NOTE: If the printed results report includes an error message, clear the error as follows.
Reflection light intensity drift:   Internal measurement operation is interfered by lights coming 
from outside of the instrument. Remove the cause, and use the 
same check strips to retry check measurement.
Test strip out-of-position:   The check strip is out of position. Use the same check strips to 
retry check measurement.

                     Start    Go back

  Check measurement
  (5300)             2006-01-09  14:16
  Measurement completed.
  ***** 2006-01-09 14:15 ****
        430[nm]    89.1 %
        500[nm]    93.5 %
        565[nm]    89.0 %
        635[nm]     9.4 %
        760[nm]   100.0 %
           Print              Go back
ReflectivityWavelengths





2-48
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  8    Evaluate the results again.
1 Check the second result reports to see if the results fall within the range listed on the container 
label. 
  If the results are:
  Within range:
   The instrument is working correctly. However, the check strips used for the first check 
measurement are abnormal. Do not use these strips from now on. Go to step  9  .
  Out of range:
  There is something wrong with the instrument. Go to step 
 9  , and then, contact your distributor.
  9    Take the check strips out of the waste box.
1 Press Go back  three times to put the instrument on 
standby.
2 Pull out the waste box tray and take the check strips 
out of the box.
3 Store the check strips in the container.
4 Load the test strips removed from the feeder in step  
 1  into the feeder as they were.
• View the standby screen to see if the combination 
of the test strips and feeder is correct.
5 Close the feeder cover, and turn the locking lever 
clockwise to lock the cover.

           Print              Go back

Check strips





AX-4030
2-49
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
Displayed and Printed Reports2.8
This section describes what information the displayed and printed reports provide.
REFERENCE: Any information including results and error lists is not printed out if the built-in 
printer is disabled (see “3.4.2 Enabling/Disabling the Built-in Printer” on page 3-18).
  2.8.1    Displayed Results Report
When at least one result is obtained by normal measurement, Results  will appear on the lowest line 
of the screen. Pressing Results  displays the result on the screen in the format shown below. The 
obtained results are stored in memory and can be retrieved on the screen later by key operation. For 
more information about the components from 1 to 8 in the figure, see the appropriate sections in 
“2.8.2 Printed Results Report” on the next page.
Example

  View
  Date 2006-01-09 11:16 Kind NORMAL
  No. 0150 Po. 001-05 Strip 1: 9EB
  ID 000000000000000000
   GLU  -            *PRO  4+
   BIL  -             URO  NORMAL
   PH   7.0          !BLD  +-
  *KET  4+            NIT  -
   LEU  -      
   TURB -             S.G. 1.000
  COLOR LIGHT YELLOW
          <<<<<<<<  >>>>>>>>  Go back
3. Measurement date and time, 1. Type of measurement
1. Measurement No., 4. Rack-port No., 4. Feeder and test strip
2. ID
5. Results obtained with test strip
6. Turbidity, 7. Specific gravity
8. Color-tone





2-50
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B

  2.8.2    Printed Results Report
During measurement of urine samples and controls, the instrument prints a results report each 
time it obtains a result by analyzing an individual sample or control. See the following figure for 
information on what the printed results report includes.
Example
1. Abnormal Mark, Type of Measurement, and Measurement Number
An abnormal mark, the type of measurement and measurement number appear at the beginning of 
the results report.
■ Abnormal mark
An abnormal result is flagged with a black circle (●) or question mark (?). The whole first line 
appears in reverse video to make it immediately recognizable. The question mark has a higher 
priority than the black circle.
● The sample is positive or abnormally colored.
? The instrument is operating abnormally.
Example

 Measure        No.0001
 ID   1234567890-ABCDEFG
 2006-01-10 13:41    25
 Po.001-01 Strip  9EB(1)
========================
 GLU    50       mg/dl
 PRO    -
 BIL    -
 URO    NORMAL
 PH     7.0
 BLD    -
 KET    -
 NIT    -
 LEU    -
 TURB   1+
 S.G.   1.000
 Color  Colorless
========================
 No sample
========================
1. Abnormal mark, type of measurement, measurement No.
2. ID
3. Measurement date and time, and ambient temperature
4. Rack-port No., type of test strip (feeder No.)
5. Result obtained with a test strip
    (abnormal mark, item name, qualitative value, 
     semiquantitative/reflectivity*)
6. Turbidity (abnormal mark, qualitative value, turbidity value*, error)
7. S.G. (abnormal mark, S.G. value, error)
8. Color tone
9. Error message
* The reflectivity and turbidity value (TURB) are 
   included when the result format is set to [Reflectivity].

 Measure        No.0002 
 ID   1234567890-ABCDEFF
 2006-01-10  13:41





AX-4030
2-51
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
■ Type of measurement
There are 6 types of measurements as listed below.
Measure Normal measurement
Stat Port or rack STAT measurement
Control-L Low-density control measurement
Control-M Middle-density control measurement
Control-H High-density control measurement
Check Check measurement
■ Measurement number
An assigned measurement number, from 0000 to 9999, appears.
2. ID
An ID number appears when the barcode reader reads a barcode from a labeled sample tube. An ID 
can contain up to 18 characters, and shorter IDs are preceded by spaces to fill all the 18 digits. For 
samples with no ID, 18 hyphens (-) appear instead.
3. Measurement Date and Time, and Ambient Temperature
The date and time when the measurement is carried out and the ambient temperature in centigrade 
appear here. The default date format is “year (4 digits) - month (2 digits) - day (2 digits)”.
REFERENCE: The date format can be changed to “day (2 digits) - month (2 digits) - year (4 
digits)” or “month (2 digits) - day (2 digits) - year (4 digits)”. To have the parameter settings 
changed, contact your distributor.
4. Rack-Port Number, Type of Test Strip, and Feeder Number
The rack-port number identifies where the sample is located. The first 3 digits represent sample 
rack count from the beginning of the batch, and the following 2 digits represent the port number on 
the sample rack (see also “Rack-port number” in “2.1.3 Measurement Terminology” on page 2-4). 
Example: “Po. 004-08” shows the sample is loaded in port 8 of the forth sample rack.

 Po.001-01 Strip  9EB(1)
Feeder number (1 or 2)
Type of test strip
Rack-port number





2-52
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
5. Results Obtained with the Test Strip
Example
■ Abnormal mark
Abnormal results obtained with the test strips are flagged with an asterisk (*) or exclamation mark 
(!). The exclamation mark flag has a higher priority than the asterisk flag.
(Blank) Normal (negative)
* Abnormal value (positive)
! Abnormal color (positive)
■ Qualitative value
Qualitative values are represented as “NORMAL” or as a plus (+) or minus (-) assigned numeric 
value.
■ Semiquantitative value/reflectivity
A semiquantitative value is the concentration and its unit.
REFERENCE:  The qualitative or semiquantitative values appear by default, however they 
can be replaced with qualitative value and reflectivities. For instructions, see “3.2.2 Using a 
Different Results Format” on page 3-4.
6. Turbidity
REFERENCE: The turbidity measurement value is added if the result format is set to 
[Reflectivity] (see “3.2.2 Using a Different Results Format” on page 3-4).
■ Abnormal turbidity mark
The result is flagged with an asterisk (*) if it is abnormal. Normal results are printed with no 
abnormal marks.
■ Qualitative values
Qualitative values are shown as follows:
Clear -
Turbid 1+
Dense turbid 2+
■ Error
If an incorrect turbidity result is obtained, either of the following messages will be added. For more 
information, see “5.4.3 Turbidity Measurement-Related Errors” on page 5-20.
CAL. ERR. The calibration result of the turbidity meter is abnormal.
ERROR Turbidity measurement was not performed for some reason.

*GLU   4+   OVER mg/dl
!PRO   3+    300 mg/dl





AX-4030
2-53
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
J
7. Specific Gravity (S.G.)
■ Abnormal S.G. mark
Abnormal S.G. results are flagged with an asterisk (*).
(Blank) Normal
*
The GLU and PRO correction is beyond capability (their results are shown as “OVER”).
The S.G. value falls out of the upper or lower thresholds set for the instrument.
■ Errors
If an incorrect S.G. result is obtained, any of the following messages will be added. For more 
information, see “5.4.2 S.G. Measurement-Related Errors” on page 5-19.
UNDER The result is lower than the specified range.
OVER The result is higher than the specified range.
-------- Specific gravity was not measured for some reason.
CAL. ERR. S.G. calibration has not been performed yet.
8. Color tone
The color tone of samples is determined from 23 colors, which includes 21 combinations of 7 
colors (yellow, orange, brown, red, violet, blue, and green) and 3 intensity levels (light, normal, 
dark), colorless, and others.
COLORLESS
YELLOW LIGHT, normal and DARK are indicated for each color. 
Example: LIGHT YELLOW, YELLOW, and DARK YELLOW
ORANGE
BROWN
RED
VIOLET
BLUE
GREEN
OTHER
REFERENCE: If the result format is set to [Reflectivity], the color tone results are represented as 
[x] and [y].





2-54
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

9. Error Messages
If an error related to measurement or computing occurs, an appropriate message is added at the end 
of the results report. For more information, see “5.4.1 Results-Related Errors” on page 5-17.
Messages Descriptions
No sample No sample was detected.
Skipped The sample was not measured.
Reflection light intensity drift The light intensity is drifting.
Excess reflectivity The reflectivity was excessively high.
Test strip out-of-position The test strip was placed out of the correct position.
Abnormal sampling The nozzle could not spot the sample on the test strip.
  2.8.3    Abnormal Results List
If incorrect results are obtained, you can manually print an abnormal results list to determine 
the cause of the error. This list includes information related to the results that are obtained after 
powering-on. For instructions, see “3.5.2 Printing the Abnormal Results List” on page 3-24. For 
information on the error messages that can appear in this list, see “5.4.4 Messages on the Abnormal 
Results List” on page 5-20.
Example
  2.8.4    Error and Trouble List (Automatic Report)
If an error or trouble occurs, the appropriate code is automatically reported on a printout. An error 
code consists of an “E” and a 3-digit number and a trouble code, a “T” and a 3-digit number. For 
information on the error and trouble codes, see “5.2 When an Error Occurs” on page 5-6 and “5.3 
When Trouble Occurs” on page 5-10.
Example

 2005-01-11
 Time   No.       Port  
 12:34  0001      001-05
 S.G. measurement error
Measurement date
Measurement time, measurement No., rack-port number
Error message

 2005-01-11 12:34
 E110 001 - 002 - 003
------------------------
 2005-01-11 12:40
 T120 123 - 456 - 789
Measurement date and time
Error code (“E” and 3-digit number) or
trouble code (“T” and 3-digit number), and
its detailed information (3-digit number)
* The detailed information is to be used by ARKRAY servicemen.





AX-4030
2-55
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2.8.5    Trouble List (Manual Report)
You can manually print the trouble list, which contains error and trouble history records. For 
instructions for printing it out, see “3.5.1 Printing a Trouble List” on page 3-23. For information 
on the error and trouble codes, see “5.2 When an Error Occurs” on page 5-6 and “5.3 When 
Trouble Occurs” on page 5-10.
Example

 2005-01-11 10:45
 E110 001 - 002 - 003
 2005-01-11 10:48
 T210 001 - 002 - 395
 2005-01-11 10:58
 T214 143 - 234 - 512
 2005-01-11 11:14
 T220 015 - 024 - 035
 2005-01-11 11:21
 E122 011 - 302 - 400
Measurement date and time
Error code (“E” and 3-digit number) or
trouble code (“T” and 3-digit number), and
its detailed information (3-digit number)
* The detailed information is to be used by ARKRAY servicemen.





2-56
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2.8.6    Check Measurement Result Report
Once check measurement has been completed, you can press  Print   to obtain a printed results 
report.
Example
When measurement was interfered with lights from outside of the instrument:
When the check strip was placed out of position and could not be measured:

CHECK Serial No.12345678
        2006-01-10 14:10
========================
430[nm]            89.3%
500[nm]            93.1%
565[nm]            88.5%
635[nm]             9.7%
760[nm]           100.0%
Type of measurement
Measurement date and time
Reflectivities
Wavelengths

CHECK
        2006-01-10 14:10
========================
Reflection light intensity drift
========================
Error message

CHECK
        2006-01-10 14:10
========================
Test strip out-of-position
========================
Error message





AX-4030
2-57
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  2.8.7    List of Current Parameter Settings
A list of the current parameter settings can be manually printed out. For instructions, see “3.5.3 
Printing the Current Parameter Settings” on page 3-25.
Example

  AX-4030 V01.00
      Serial No.12345678
        2005-01-11 12:40
========================
Printer setup
Use/No use
 [Use                                       ]
========================
External output setup
Use/No use
 [No Use                                    ]
========================
Beeper volume setting
Beeper volume                             [2]
========================
Test strip setup
Test strip in feeder 1              [9EB ]
Test strip in feeder 2              [9EB ]
Main feeder                               [1]
========================
Rack assignment for test strip
#01 [1: 9EB ]
#02 [1: 9EB ]
#03 [1: 9EB ]
#04 [1: 9EB ]
#05 [1: 9EB ]
#06 [1: 9EB ]
#07 [1: 9EB ]
#08 [1: 9EB ]
#09 [1: 9EB ]
#10 [2: 9EB ]
========================
Result display format
Sample
 [Semi-quantitative values                  ]
Control
 [Semi-quantitative values                  ]
========================
Measurement No. setup
Measurement start No.
 [Initialize for every batch                ]
Measurement No.
 [Assign to samples                         ]
Product name and software version
Print date and time
Printer (use/no use)
External output (use/no use)
Beeper volume
The type of test strips in feeder 1
The type of test strips in feeder 2
Feeder specified as the main feeder
Result format for samples
Result format for controls
Measurement start number assignment
Measurement number assignment
Item racks (rack IDs) and assigned test strips (feeder number)





2-58
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL





AX-4030
3-1
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Auxiliary 
Operations
3.1  Menu Configuration ..................................................3-2
3.2  [Parameter settings] Menu ......................................3-4
  3.2.1  Assigning the Type of Test Strips 
 
      to the Item Racks
.............................3-4
  3.2.2  Using a Different Results Format ................
3-4
  3.2.3  Configuring the 
 
      Measurement Numbering Method ...
3-6
3.3  [Results] Menu ..........................................................3-8
  3.3.1  Printing/Transmitting Results ......................
3-8
  3.3.2  Reviewing Results/Editing IDs ..................3-12
  3.3.3  Deleting Results and 
 
      Trouble Logs from Memory ...........3-15
3.4  [Initial settings] Menu .............................................3-17
  3.4.1  Setting the System Clock ..........................3-17
  3.4.2  Enabling/Disabling the Built-in Printer ......3-18
  3.4.3  Enabling/Disabling the External Output ....
3-20
  3.4.4  Controlling the Beeper Volume .................3-21
3.5  [Print] Menu .............................................................3-23
  3.5.1  Printing a Trouble List ...............................
3-23
  3.5.2  Printing the Abnormal Results List ............
3-24
  3.5.3  Printing the Current Parameter Settings ...
3-25
3.6  [Maintenance] Menu ...............................................3-27
  3.6.1  Viewing Maintenance Information .............
3-27
Chapter
3





3-2
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

This section describes the hierarchy of the menu system starting with the [Main menu] screen, and 
lists the lower-layer menu screens and the options accessible from these screens.
■ [Main menu] screen (No. 0000)
To go to the [Main menu] screen, press   Menu   on the 
standby screen. The [Main menu] screen lists 5 options 
for accessing the lower-layer menu screens listed 
below.
■ [Parameter settings] screen (No. 1000)
No. Options Description (default bolded)
See page(s)
1100 Rack 
assignment for 
test strip
Assigns a feeder (type of test strips in it) to each item rack (#01 
- #10).
2-19
#01 to #10 : × 
(main feeder), 1 (feeder 1), 2 (feeder 2)
1200 Results 
display format
Selects the result format for patient samples and controls.
3-4
Normal measurement: 
Semiquantitative, Reflectivity
Control measurement: 
Semiquantitative, Reflectivity
1300 Measurement 
No. setup
Configures the measurement numbering system. 
3-6
Measurement start No.: 
Continue from previous batch, 
  Initialize for every batch
Measurement No.: 
Assign to samples, Assign to ports
■ [Results] screen (No. 2000)
No. Options Description (default bolded)
See page(s)
2100 Print Reprints the results stored in memory. 3-8
Date:  Specify a range of days. 
(today)
Measurement:  Normal & STAT measurements, 
  Normal measurement, STAT measurement, 
  Control measurement, Check measurement
Results:   
All, Normal results only,  
Include abnormal results, Barcode misread
Range of results: 
All, Measurement No., Port No., ID
2200 Transmit Transmits the results stored in memory to an external device. 3-8
Date:  Specify a range of days. 
(today)
Measurement:  Normal & STAT measurements, 
  Normal measurement, STAT measurement, 
  Control measurement, Check measurement
Results:   
All, Normal results only,  
Include abnormal results, Barcode misread
Range of results: 
All, Measurement No., Port No., ID
Menu Configuration3.1

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  10:10
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
Screen number





AX-4030
3-3
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
No. Options Description (default bolded)
See page(s)
2300 View Allows you to view the results stored in memory. 3-12
Date:  Specify a range of days. 
(today)
Measurement:  Normal & STAT measurements, 
  Normal measurement, STAT measurement, 
  Control measurement, Check measurement
Results:   
All, Normal results only,  
Include abnormal results, Barcode misread
Range of results: 
All, Measurement No., Port No., ID
2400 Delete Deletes results and trouble data from memory. 3-15
Measurement:  All, Normal & STAT measurements, 
  Control measurement, Check measurement, 
  Trouble list
■ [Initial settings] screen (No. 3000)
No.
Options
Description (default bolded)
See page(s)
3100 System clock 
setup
Allows you to adjust the system date and time that appears on the 
display and printed reports.
3-17
Date: present date, Time: present time
3200 Printer setup Enables or disables the built-in printer. 3-18
Use/No use: 
Use, No use
3300 External 
output setup
Enables or disables the external output. 3-20
Use/No use: Use, 
No use
3400 Beeper 
volume setting
Controls the volume of the beeper that alerts you to an error or 
trouble.
3-21
Beeper volume: 00 to 09 
(The default is 05.)
■ [Print] screen (No. 4000)
No. Options Description (default bolded)
See page(s)
4100 Trouble list Prints a list of errors and troubles that have arisen so far. 3-23
Date: A range of days
4200 Abnormal 
results list
Prints a list of abnormal results obtained after power-on. 3-24
4300 Parameter 
settings
Prints a list of current parameter settings for the instrument.
3-25
■ [Maintenance] screen (No. 5000)
No. Options Description (default bolded)
See page(s)
5100 S.G. cell 
washout
Washes the S.G. cell.
4-24
5200 Clean washing 
bath and tray
Moves the mechanical parts to make room for you to access the 
washing bath and transport tray.
4-19
4-26
5300 Check 
measurement
Measures a check strip for instrument diagnosis.
2-43
5400 Maintenance 
information
Allows you to check the days when the maintenance tasks were 
last performed. (S.G. calibration, S.G. cell washout, washing bath 
and transport tray cleaning, and check measurement)
3-27





3-4
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
[Parameter settings] Menu3.2
  3.2.1    Assigning the Type of Test Strips to the Item Racks
For successful use of the item racks, assign feeder 1 
or 2 to each item rack (rack IDs #01 to #10) before 
running tests. For example, you can set it so that 
samples in the item rack “#01” are measured with the 
test strips in “feeder 1”. The feeder can be feeder 1, 2, 
or the main feeder (represented as [ ]).
For detailed instructions, see “2.3.4 Assigning the 
Type of Test Strips to the Item Racks” on page 2-19.
  3.2.2    Using a Different Results Format
Results obtained from sample and control measurements can be reported as qualitative values, 
semiquantitative values and/or reflectivities. This results format takes effect on the displayed and 
printed reports and the data transmitted to external devices as listed below.
Options [Semiquantitative] [Reflectivity]
Displayed report Qualitative or semiquantitative values* Reflectivity only
Printed report Qualitative or semiquantitative values* Qualitative values and reflectivity
External output data Qualitative and semiquantitative values Qualitative values and reflectivity
* Either qualitative or semiquantitative values are automatically selected depending on measurement items.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 1 to go to the [Parameter settings] screen.

  Rack assignment for test strip
  (1100)             2006-01-09  10:12
    #01 [  ×   ]
    #02 [  ×   ]
    #03 [1:9EB ]
    #04 [1:9EB ]
    #05 [1:9EB ]
    #06 [1:9EB ]
    #07 [2:9EB ]
    #08 [2:9EB ]
    #09 [2:9EB ]
    #10 [2:9EB ]
                       OK      Cancel

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back





AX-4030
3-5
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
3 Press 2 to go to the [Results display format] screen.
  2    Select the results format for samples and controls.
1 Select the options by pressing the hyphen key.
• To move the cursor up or down, press   .
• For information on the available options, see the 
table on the previous page.
2 Press    OK    .
• A message window will open to ask if you want to 
save your changes.
  3    Save your settings.
1 Press    OK    to save your settings.
• The [Parameter settings] screen will appear again.
NOTE: Keep the power on while saving the 
settings.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Parameter settings] 
screen to return to the standby screen.

  Parameter settings
  (1000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Rack assignment for test strip
  2 Results display format
  3 Measurement No. setup

  Results display format
  (1200)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Sample
  [Semiquantitative                 ]
  Control measurement
  [Semiquantitative                 ]

  Results display format
  (1200)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Sample
  [Semiquantitative                 ]
  Control
  [Semiquantitative                 ]
                       OK      Cancel

  Results display format
  (1200)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Sample
  [Semiquantitative                 ]
  Control
  [Semiquantitative                 ]
             OK                Cancel
  Save setting changes?





3-6
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  3.2.3    Configuring the Measurement Numbering Method
You can configure how measurement numbering is performed.
[Measurement start No.] [Continue from previous batch] Assigns serial measurement numbers 
through batches.
[Initialize for every batch] Resets the measurement numbering at the 
beginning of each batch.
[Measurement No.] [Assign to samples] Assigns measurement numbers to samples.
[Assign to ports] Assigns measurement numbers to all of the 
ports regardless of whether the ports have 
samples or not.
IMPORTANT: When [Measurement No.] is set to [Assign to ports], the instrument skips 
one or more samples from the beginning of a batch depending on the set measurement 
start number. This takes place because measurement numbering is made so that the 
ones place of the port number matches that of the measurement number. For example, 
when the measurement start number is set to “5”, the instrument skips ports 1 to 4 and 
measures samples from port 5.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 1 to go to the [Parameter settings] screen.

0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 00290021 0022 0023 0030
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Skipped
1st rack
2nd rack
When [Measurement No.] is set to "5":

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back





AX-4030
3-7
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
3 Press 3 to go to the [Measurement No. setup] 
screen.
  2    Set the measurement numbering method.
1 Select the options by pressing the hyphen key.
• To move the cursor up or down, press   .
• For information about available options, see the 
table on the previous page.
2 Press    OK    .
• A message window will open to ask if you want to 
save your changes.
  3    Save your changes.
1 Press    OK    to save your changes.
• The [Parameter settings] screen will appear again.
NOTE: Keep the power on while saving the 
settings.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Parameter settings] 
screen to return to the standby screen.

  Parameter settings
  (1000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Rack assignment for test strip
  2 Results display format
  3 Measurement No. setup

  Measurement No. setup
  (1300)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Measurement start No.
  [Continue from previous batch     ]
  Measurement No.
  [Assign to samples                ]
                       OK      Cancel

  Results display format
  (1200)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Sample
  [Semiquantitative                 ]
  Control
  [Semiquantitative                 ]
                       OK      Cancel

             OK                Cancel
  Save setting changes?





3-8
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

The results obtained by measurement are stored in memory, and can be retrieved anytime as printed 
or displayed reports or external output data. If the memory becomes full, the oldest data is replaced 
with the latest one. Note that the deleted results can never be recovered. The maximum number of 
results that can be stored in memory depend on the type of measurement as below.
Normal and STAT measurement Total of 2500 measurements
Control measurement Max. 200 measurements
Check measurement Max. 50 measurements
REFERENCE: You may not obtain printed reports or transmit data to an external device if 
the built-in printer or external output capability is disabled. For more information, see “3.4.2 
Enabling/Disabling the Built-in Printer” on page 3-18 and “3.4.3 Enabling/Disabling the External 
Output” on page 3-20.
REFERENCE:  Lists of errors, abnormal results, and parameter settings can also be printed out. 
For instructions, see “3.5 [Print] Menu” on page 3-23.
  3.3.1    Printing/Transmitting Results
The results stored in memory can be manually printed out or transferred to a connected external 
device. You can specify what results you want by date, type of measurement, type of results, and 
measurement number. Use the same procedure for printing and transmitting results (the following 
procedure is explained with the screen images for printing as an example). 
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 2 to go to the [Results] screen.
3 Press 1 to go to the [Print] screen. 
Press 2 to go to the [Transmit] screen.
[Results] Menu3.3

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Results
  (2000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Print
  2 Transmit
  3 View
  4 Delete





AX-4030
3-9
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2    Select the results you want.
1 Select the results you want.
• See the table below for information on available 
options.
• To select an option, press the hyphen key.
• To move the cursor down, press   , and to move 
up, press   .
• Below [Date], press the hyphen key to move the 
cursor between the year, month, and day entry 
fields, and press   to move from the start date 
field (left) to the end date fields (right). For more 
information, see “Date” in “1.7.3 Menu Operations 
and Examples” on page 1-44.
Parameters Description
Date Specify the range of days when the results you want were obtained. Enter the start date 
in the left field, and the end date in the right field. Ensure the right field contains a later 
date than the left field.
Measurement Select the type of measurement from:
  [Normal & STAT measurements], [Normal measurement], 
  [STAT measurement], [Control measurement], and [Check measurement].
Results Select the type of results from:
  [All]:  Normal and abnormal results, and barcode misread results
  [Normal results only]:  Normal results only
  [Include abnormal results]:  Normal and abnormal results
  [Barcode misread]:  Barcode misread results only
Range of 
results
Select how you want to specify a range of results from:
  [All]:  Include all results.
  [Measurement No.]: Specify a range of results by measurement number.
  [Port No.]:  Specify a range of results by 4-digit port number.
  [ID]:  Specify a specific result by ID.
REFERENCE: For the [Range of results] setting, [Measurement No.] and [Port No.] allow you to 
specify one or more consecutive results, whereas [ID] allows a single result only.
2 Press    OK    .
• When [Range of results] is set to [All], the results are 
soon output to the printer or external device.
• When another option is selected, go to step  3  .

  Print
  (2100)             2006-01-09  11:01
  Date
  <06-01-06> - <06-01-08> (YY-MM-DD)
  Measurement
  [Normal & STAT measurements        ]
  Results
  [All                               ]
  Range of results
  [All                               ]
             BS        OK      Cancel
This can be replaced with 
"Transmit (2200)".

  Print
  (2100)             2006-01-09  11:01
  Date
  <06-01-06> - <06-01-08> (YY-MM-DD)
  Measurement
  [Normal & STAT measurements        ]
  Results
  [All                               ]
  Range of results
  [Measurement No.                   ]
             BS        OK      Cancel





3-10
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  3    Specify a range of results.
1 Specify a range of results you want.
For [Measurement No.]/[Port No.]
• Enter the start number.
• Press   to go to the end number entry field.
• Enter the end number, and go to step 2.
• Ensure the end number is larger than the start 
number.
REFERENCE: For example, to enter “0150”, press 
0, 1, 5, 0 in that order. To correct the entry, press  
   BS    to delete digits one by one, and enter a 
new value.
REFERENCE: For information on 4-digit port 
numbers used here, see “REFERENCE” in 
“Rack-port number” in “2.1.3 Measurement 
Terminology” on page 2-4.
For [ID]
• Enter the ID of the result you want using the 
alphanumeric keys. An ID can contain up to 18 
digits, and can include numbers, alphabet, and 
special characters (see page 1-45).
• Go to step 2.
• The ID can also be input by having the optional 
hand-held barcode reader read a barcode from the 
labeled sample.
REFERENCE: For detailed instructions, see “ID” 
in “Entering Alphanumerics” in “1.7.3 Menu 
Operations and Examples” on page 1-45. To 
correct the entry, press    BS    to delete digits 
one by one, and enter a new value.

  Print
  (2100)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Measurement No.
  <0001> - <2000>
             BS        OK      Cancel

[Measurement No.] setup

  Print
  (2100)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Port No.
  <0001> - <0020>
             BS        OK      Cancel

[Port No.] setup

  Print
  (2100)             2006-01-09  11:02
  ID
  <060108-001-00248>
             BS        OK      Cancel

[ID] setup





AX-4030
3-11
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
2 Press    OK    .
• The results will be sent to the printer or external 
device.
REFERENCE: If “Not found.” is displayed, there is 
no matching data in memory. Press    OK    to 
return to the previous screen.

  Print
  (2100)             2006-01-09  11:02
  ID
  <060108-001-00248>
             BS        OK      Cancel

  Print
  (2100)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Printing...
  Please wait...





3-12
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  3.3.2    Reviewing Results/Editing IDs
The results stored in memory can be reviewed on the screen. You can view all the results in turn or 
retrieve only results specified by type of measurement, type of results, and measurement number. 
The ID edit feature is useful when you have a result with the ID field filled with hyphens (-) due to 
barcode misreading. You can use the alphanumeric keys or optional hand-held barcode reader to 
correct the ID.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 2 to go to the [Results] screen.
3 Press 3 to go to the [View] screen.
  2    Select the results you want.
1 Select the results you want to view.
REFERENCE: For detailed instructions, see step  2  
on page 3-9.
2 Press    OK    .
• Go to the appropriate step according to the selection 
below [Results].
  [All]: Go to step  4  .
  [Measurement No.], [Port No.], or [ID]:  
        Go to step  3  .

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Results
  (2000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Print
  2 Transmit
  3 View
  4 Delete

  View
  (2300)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Date
  <06-01-06> - <06-01-08> (YY-MM-DD)
  Measurement
  [Normal & STAT measurements        ]
  Results
  [All                               ]
  Range of results
  [Measurement No.                   ]
             BS        OK      Cancel





AX-4030
3-13
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3    Specify a range of results.
1 Specify the range of results you want.
For [Measurement No.]/[Port No.] 
• Enter the start number.
• Press   to go to the end number entry field.
• Enter the end number, and go to step 2.
• Ensure the end number is larger than the start 
number.
REFERENCE: For example, to enter “0150”, press 
0, 1, 5, 0 in that order. To correct the entry, press  
   BS    to delete digits one by one, and enter a 
new value.
REFERENCE: For information on 4-digit port 
numbers used here, see “REFERENCE” in 
“Rack-port number” in “2.1.3 Measurement 
Terminology” on page 2-4.
For [ID]
• Enter the ID of the result you want using the 
alphanumeric keys. An ID can contain up to 18 
digits, and can include numbers, alphabet, and 
special characters (see page 1-45).
• Go to step 2.
• The ID can also be input by having the optional 
hand-held barcode reader read a barcode from the 
labeled sample.
REFERENCE: For detailed instructions, see “ID” 
in “Entering Alphanumerics” in “1.7.3 Menu 
Operations and Examples” on page 1-45. To 
correct the entry, press    BS    to delete digits 
one by one, and enter a new value.
2 Press    OK    to display the results.
[Measurement No.] setup
[Port No.] setup

  View
  (2300)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Measurement No.
  <0001> - <2000>
             BS        OK      Cancel

  View
  (2300)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Port No.
  <0001> - <0020>
             BS        OK      Cancel

  View
  (2300)             2006-01-09  11:02
  ID
  <060108-001-00248>
             BS        OK      Cancel

  View
  (2300)             2006-01-09  11:02
  ID
  <060108-001-00248>
             BS        OK      Cancel

[ID] setup





3-14
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
  4    Display the results report.
1 Display the results on the screen.
• To modify the ID, go to step  5  .
REFERENCE:  A results report is displayed for a 
single sample at a time. To view the previous 
or next result, press <<<<<<<< or >>>>>>>> 
respectively. Pressing Go back  returns to the 
setup screen.
REFERENCE: For detailed information on the 
displayed results reports, see “2.8.1 Displayed 
Results Report” on page 2-49.
  5    Edit the ID (if necessary).
If the ID is filled with hyphens only due to barcode misreading, you can enter a correct number 
using the alphanumeric keys or optional hand-held barcode reader.
1 Display the results whose ID you want to modify.
2 Press the hyphen key to open the [ID edit] window.
3 Enter a correct ID number. 
• An ID can contain up to 18 digits, and can include 
numbers, alphabet, and special characters (see page 
1-45).
• The ID can also be input by having the optional 
hand-held barcode reader read a barcode from a 
labeled sample.
REFERENCE: For detailed instructions, see “ID” 
in “Entering Alphanumerics” in “1.7.3 Menu 
Operations and Examples” on page 1-45. To 
correct the entry, press    BS    to delete digits 
one by one, and enter a new value.
4 Press    OK    to save your changes.
• The [ID edit] window will close.

  View
  Date 2006-01-09 10:35 Kind NORMAL
  No. 0001 Po. 001-05 Strip 1: 9EB
  ID 000000000000000000
   GLU  -            *PRO  4+
   BIL  -             URO  NORMAL
   PH   7.0          !BLD  +-
  *KET  4+            NIT  -
   LEU  -      
   TURB -             S.G. 1.000
  COLOR LIGHT YELLOW
          <<<<<<<<  >>>>>>>>  Go back

  View
  Date 2006-01-09 10:35 Kind NORMAL
  No. 0001 Po. 001-05 Strip 1: 9EB
  ID 000000000000000000
   GLU  -            *PRO  4+
   BIL  -             URO  NORMAL
   PH   7.0          !BLD  +-
  *KET  4+            NIT  -
   LEU  -      
   TURB -             S.G. 1.000
  COLOR LIGHT YELLOW
                       OK
    ID edit
    <123456789012345678>





AX-4030
3-15
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3.3.3    Deleting Results and Trouble Logs from Memory
Unwanted results and trouble logs can be deleted from the memory. You can delete all of 
the results and trouble information at once, or specific types of data only (normal and STAT 
measurement results, control measurement results, check measurement results, or trouble list).
NOTE: Deleted results and trouble logs can never be recovered.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 2 to go to the [Results] screen.
3 Press 4 to go to the [Delete] screen.
  2    Select the type of data you want to delete.
1 Select the type of data you want to delete, using the 
hyphen key.
• The available options include:
  [All], [Normal & STAT measurements], [Control 
measurement], [Check measurement], and [Trouble 
list].
2 Press    OK    .
• You will be asked if you want to delete the data.

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Results
  (2000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Print
  2 Transmit
  3 View
  4 Delete

  Delete
  (2400)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Measurement
  [Normal & STAT measurements        ]
                       OK      Cancel





3-16
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  3    Delete the data.
1 Press    OK    to delete the data from memory.
• The [Results] screen will appear again.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Results] screen to return 
to the standby screen.

  Delete
  (2400)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Measurement
  [[Normal & STAT measurements       ]
             OK                Cancel
  Delete data?





AX-4030
3-17
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
[Initial settings] Menu3.4
  3.4.1    Setting the System Clock
The internal system clock may not keep the right time after initially installing the instrument or a 
long period of disuse. Set the system clock to the exact time. The date and time that appear on the 
display and printed reports follow the system clock.
REFERENCE: The instrument supports three date formats: “year-month-day (default)”, “day-
month-year”, and “month-day-year”. This section explains the procedure based on the “year-
month-day” format. If you are using another format, set a new date accordingly. To have the 
date format parameter setting changed, contact your distributor.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 3 to go to the [Initial settings] screen.
3 Press 1 to go to the [System clock setup] screen.
  2    Adjust the date and time.
1 Below [Date], enter the date of today.
• To move through the year, month, and day entry 
fields, press the hyphen key.
• To move down to the [Time] entry field, press   .
2 Below [Time], enter the current time.
• To move between the hour and minute entry fields, 
press the hyphen key.

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Initial settings
  (3000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 System clock setup
  2 Printer setup
  3 External output setup
  4 Beeper volume setting

  System clock setup
  (3100)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Date
  <05-10-11>(YY-MM-DD)
  Time
  <19:25>
             BS        OK      Cancel





3-18
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

3 Press    OK    to save your changes.
• The [Initial settings] screen will appear again.
NOTE: Keep the power on while saving the 
settings.
4 Press Go back  twice on the [Initial settings] screen to return to the standby screen.
  3.4.2    Enabling/Disabling the Built-in Printer
The built-in printer is enabled by default, and can be disabled as needed. Once the printer has been 
disabled, it does not print any information.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 3 to go to the [Initial settings] screen.
3 Press 2 to go to the [Printer setup] screen.

  System clock setup
  (3100)             2006-01-09  11:07
  Date
  <05-10-11>(YY-MM-DD)
  Time
  <19:25>
             BS        OK      Cancel

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Initial settings
  (3000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 System clock setup
  2 Printer setup
  3 External output setup
  4 Beeper volume setting





AX-4030
3-19
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2    Enable or disable the printer.
1 Below [Use/No use], select [Use] or [No use] using 
the hyphen key.
2 Press    OK    .
• A message window will open to ask if you want to 
save the new setting.
  3    Save your setting.
1 Press    OK    to save your setting.
• The [Initial settings] screen will appear again.
NOTE: Keep the power on while saving the setting.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Initial settings] screen to 
return to the standby screen.

  Printer setup
  (3200)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Use/No use
  [Use                               ]
                       OK      Cancel

  Printer setup
  (3200)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Use/No use
  [No use                            ]
             OK                Cancel
  Save setting changes?





3-20
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  3.4.3    Enabling/Disabling the External Output 
The instrument has two data output terminals on the rear panel, which are disabled by default. 
When you connect external devices to these terminals, change the parameter setting to enable the 
external output.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 3 to go to the [Initial settings] screen.
3 Press 3 to go to the [External output setup] screen.
  2    Enable or disable the external output.
1 Below [Use/No use], select [Use] or [No use] using 
the hyphen key.
2 Press    OK    .
• A message window will open to ask if you want to 
save the new setting.

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Initial settings
  (3000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 System clock setup
  2 Printer setup
  3 External output setup
  4 Beeper volume setting

  External output setup
  (3300)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Use/No use
  [Use                               ]
                       OK      Cancel





AX-4030
3-21
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3    Save your setting.
1 Press    OK    to save your setting.
• The [Initial settings] screen will appear again.
NOTE: Keep the power on while saving the setting.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Initial settings] screen 
to return to the standby screen.
  3.4.4    Controlling the Beeper Volume
Beeps sound when an error or trouble occurs. The volume of the beeper can be controlled in 10 
levels, from 00 (muted) to 09 (max.).
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 3 to go to the [Initial settings] screen.
3 Press 4 to go to the [Beeper volume setting] screen.

  External output setup
  (3300)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Use/No use
  [No use                            ]
             OK                Cancel
  Save setting changes?

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Initial settings
  (3000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 System clock setup
  2 Printer setup
  3 External output setup
  4 Beeper volume setting





3-22
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  2    Select the level of the beeper volume.
1 Below [Beeper volume], select the level of the 
beeper volume from 00 to 09.
• Press   +      to increase the volume level, and 
press   -      to lower the level.
• The beeper sounds at the set level each time you 
press these function keys.
• Selecting “00” mutes the sound.
2 Press    OK    .
• A message window will open to ask if you want to 
save your setting.
  3    Save your setting.
1 Press    OK    to save your setting.
• The [Initial settings] screen will appear.
NOTE: Keep the power on while saving the setting.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Initial settings] screen to 
return to the standby screen.

  Beeper volume setting
  (3400)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Beeper volume
                        05  >>>>>
  +         -          OK      Cancel

  Beeper volume setting
  (3400)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Beeper volume
                        07  >>>>>
             OK                Cancel
  Save setting changes?





AX-4030
3-23
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
[Print] Menu3.5
You can obtain printed lists of trouble logs, abnormal results, and current parameter settings.
NOTE: The printer does not work if it is disabled by key operations. For more information, see 
“3.4.2 Enabling/Disabling the Built-in Printer” on page 3-18.
  3.5.1    Printing a Trouble List
The trouble list is a history of errors and troubles. Up to 100 errors and troubles can be recorded. 
You can include all logs or those recorded in a specific period of days in the trouble list. 
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 4 to go to the [Print] screen.
3 Press 1 to go to the [Trouble list] screen.
  2    Specify a range of history.
1 Specify the range of history to print.
• To move through the year, month, and day entry 
fields, press the hyphen key.
• To move from the start date field (left field) to the 
end date field (right field), press   .
• For detailed information on setting dates, see 
“Date” in “1.7.3 Menu Operations and Examples” 
on page 1-44.
• Ensure the end date (right field) is later than the 
start date (left field).

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Print
  (4000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Trouble list
  2 Abnormal results list
  3 Parameter settings

  Trouble list
  (4100)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Specify a period of time.
  <06-01-05> - <06-01-09> (YY-MM-DD)
             BS        OK      Cancel





3-24
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  3    Print the trouble list.
1 Press    OK    to start printing.
• The trouble list will be printed, starting with the 
latest log.
REFERENCE: The message “Not found.” will 
appear if there is no matching data in memory. 
Press    OK    to return to the [Print] screen.
• After the completion of the printout, the [Print] 
screen will appear again.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Print] screen to return to 
the standby screen.
  3.5.2    Printing the Abnormal Results List
If you obtain abnormal results, try to print the abnormal results list to determine the causes by the 
error messages. The abnormal results list includes error information related to measurement results 
that have recorded after powering-on.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 4 to go to the [Print] screen.

  System clock setup
  (3100)             2006-01-09  11:07
  Date
  <05-10-11>(YY-MM-DD)
  Time
  <19:25>
             BS        OK      Cancel

  Trouble list
  (4100)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Printing...
  Please wait...
            Stop

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back





AX-4030
3-25
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2    Print the abnormal results list.
1 Press 2 to print the abnormal results list.
REFERENCE: The message “Not found.” will 
appear if there is no matching data in memory. 
Press    OK    to return to the [Print] screen.
• After the completion of the printout, the [Print] 
screen will appear again.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Print] screen to return 
to the standby screen.
  3.5.3    Printing the Current Parameter Settings
You can obtain a list of parameter settings that includes printer and external output use, beeper 
volume, and the type of test strips for each feeder.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 4 to go to the [Print] screen.

  Print
  (4000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Trouble list
  2 Abnormal results list
  3 Parameter settings

  Abnormal results list
  (4200)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Print...
  Please wait...
            Stop

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back





3-26
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

3 Press 3 to go to the [Parameter settings] screen.
  2    Print a list of the parameter settings.
1 Press 1 to go to the [Initial settings] screen.
• A list of the parameter settings will be printed out.
• After the completion of printing, the [Print] screen 
will appear again.
2 Press Go back  twice on the [Print] screen to return to 
the standby screen.

  Print
  (4000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Trouble list
  2 Abnormal results list
  3 Parameter settings

  Parameter settings
  (4300)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Initial settings
                              Go back

  Parameter settings
  (4310)             2006-01-09  11:00
  Printing...
  Please wait...
            Stop





AX-4030
3-27
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
[Maintenance] Menu3.6
The [Maintenance] menu screen has 4 hardware maintenance options. This section describes the 
procedure for the [4. Maintenance information] option only. For instructions for other options, see 
the respective pages in chapters 2 and 4.
Options Descriptions See page(s)
1. S.G. cell washout Washes the S.G. cell.
4-24
2. Clean washing bath and tray Moves the mechanical parts to make enough room to 
access the washing bath and transport tray.
4-19
4-26
3. Check measurement Measures a check strip to examine the instrument.
2-43
4. Maintenance information Allows you to view a list of dates when maintenance 
tasks were last performed (S.G. calibration, S.G. 
cell washout, washing bath/tray cleaning, and check 
measurement).
This page
  3.6.1    Viewing Maintenance Information
You can view a list of dates when maintenance tasks were last performed. These tasks include S.G. 
calibration, S.G. cell washout, washing bath and transport tray cleaning, and check measurement.
  1    Access the setup screen.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 5 to go to the [Maintenance] screen.
  2    Display the maintenance information.
1 Press 4 to go to the [Maintenance information] 
screen.

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Maintenance
  (5000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 S.G. cell washout
  2 Clean washing bath and tray
  3 Check measurement
  4 Maintenance information





3-28
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
• The [Maintenance information] screen will appear, 
listing the last date that maintenance tasks were 
performed.
2 Press Go back  three times on the [Maintenance 
information] screen to return to the standby screen.

  Maintenance information
  (5400)             2006-01-09  11:00
  S.G. calibration
                      2006-01-08 12:00
  S.G. cell washout
                      2006-01-05 10:25
  Clean washing bath and tray
                      2006-01-05 13:55
  Check measurement
                      2006-01-05 15:20
                              Go back





AX-4030
4-1
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Maintenance
4.1  Frequency of Maintenance ......................................4-2
4.2  Daily Maintenance ....................................................4-3
  4.2.1  Cleaning the Waste Box .............................
4-3
  4.2.2  Discarding Liquid Waste 
 
      from the Drain Bottle
........................4-5
  4.2.3  Cleaning the Feeders .................................
4-6
  4.2.4  Cleaning the Test Strip Stopper ..................
4-8
  4.2.5  Washing the Introduction Tray ..................4-12
4.3  Replacement of Consumables ..............................4-15
  4.3.1  Replacing the Washing Solution ...............4-15
  4.3.2  Replacing the Thermal Printer Paper .......4-17
4.4  Regular Maintenance .............................................4-18
  4.4.1  Washing the Air Filter ...............................4-18
  4.4.2  Washing the Transport Tray .....................4-19
  4.4.3  Cleaning the S.G. Cell ..............................
4-24
  4.4.4  Cleaning the Washing Bath ......................
4-26
  4.4.5  Replacing the Washing Solution Filter ......
4-29
  4.4.6  Replacing the Drain Pinch Valve Tubes ...
4-30
  4.4.7  Replacing the White Plate ........................
4-32
4.5  Before/After Long Periods of Disuse....................4-34
  4.5.1  Preparing the Instrument 
 
      Before Long Periods of Disuse ......
4-34
  4.5.2  Starting the Instrument Up 
 
      After Long Periods of Disuse .........
4-37
Chapter
4





4-2
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Frequency of Maintenance4.1
The following table lists the maintenance tasks required at directed intervals.
   Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes when 
performing maintenance tasks marked with a checkmark ( ).
   Discard liquid waste, used parts, and cleaning tools in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
   Alcohol is sometimes used to clean the instrument. Alcohol is readily 
combustible, therefore handle it carefully and keep away from flames, 
electrical sparks and sources of heat. Also, ventilate the room sufficiently 
during use.
Maintenance task Cycle See page(s)
Waste box cleaning Every day or before reaching 400 
measurements
4-3
Liquid waste disposal (drain bottle) Every day or before reaching 600 
measurements
4-5
Feeder cleaning Every three days
4-6
Test strip stopper cleaning Every three days
4-8
Introduction tray washout Every three days 4-12
Washing solution replacement Every 600 measurements 4-15
Thermal printer paper replacement If red lines appear at both edges of the paper 4-17
Air filter washout Every month 4-18
Transport tray washout Every week 4-19
S.G. cell washout Every week
4-24
Washing bath washout Every month 4-26
Washing solution filter replacement Every month
4-29
Drain pinch valve tube replacement If drainage is leaking from the pinch valve 
tube (e.g. “T280”)
4-30
White plate replacement If warning “W007” occurs
4-32





AX-4030
4-3
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Daily Maintenance4.2
  4.2.1    Cleaning the Waste Box
Before starting the first batch of tests for the day, discard used test strips from the waste box 
and sterilize the box. The waste box can contain about 400 test strips. So, discard the test strips 
before the measurement count reaches 400. Disinfection is required each time the box is emptied 
out. If warning “W004” occurs due to the waste box reaching capacity, dispose of the test strips 
immediately.
Prepare: Alcohol, cloth, and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used test strips and protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Discard used test strips from the waste box.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed.
2 Pull out the waste box tray located on the left panel 
of the instrument.
3 Take the waste box out of the waste box tray.
4 Discard used test strips from the box.

Waste box tray





4-4
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2    Sterilize the waste box.
1 Sterilize the waste box with alcohol.
2 Rinse the box with water to remove dirt.
3 Wipe water off the surface.
  3    Install the waste box.
1 Hold the waste box tab facing forward, and place 
the box on the waste box tray.
• Ensure the waste box guides fit the concaves inside 
the tray 
2 Store the waste box tray in the instrument.
• If the waste box is correctly set in the tray, it is held 
steadily by the magnets.
• If the waste box gets caught halfway, it is set 
incorrectly.
NOTE: Ensure the waste box correctly fits into the 
tray before pushing it in. Incorrect installation may 
cause used test strips to be scattered around 
inside the instrument or to clog the test strip path.

One guide
Tab
Two guides





AX-4030
4-5
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  4.2.2    Discarding Liquid Waste from the Drain Bottle
Liquid waste discharged from the instrument flows out to the external drain bottle. Discard the 
liquid waste to empty the bottle before starting the first batch of tests every day. The drain bottle 
can contain as much liquid as an amount discharged by about 600 measurements. Check the drain 
bottle at times and discard liquid waste before the bottle becomes full.
Prepare: Alcohol and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard liquid waste and protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Discard liquid waste.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed.
   Do not try to discard liquid waste 
while the instrument is mechanically 
working (e.g., measuring samples). 
Uncapping the drain bottle in 
operation may splash the liquid 
from the tube, causing exposure to 
pathogenic microbes.
2 Uncap the drain bottle.
3 Discard liquid waste from the bottle.
  2    Sterilize the drain bottle.
1 Sterilize the drain bottle with alcohol.
2 Rinse the bottle with water to remove dirt.
  3    Install the drain bottle.
1 Cap the drain bottle, and place it where it was.

Drain bottle





4-6
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.2.3    Cleaning the Feeders
Particles from the test strips can accumulate inside the feeders. This may cause the roller slot 
to clog or soil the reagent pad area of the test strips, whereby producing incorrect measurement 
results. Clean the feeders every three days.
Prepare: Supplied blower brush, tissue paper, and protective gloves
IMPORTANT: Wear protective gloves when taking the test strips out of the feeders. Do not 
touch the pad area on the test strips with unprotected hands. Test strips contaminated 
with sebum may produce incorrect results.
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
  2    Take the test strips out of the feeder.
1 Turn the locking lever (a) to unlock the feeder 
cover, and open the cover (b).

Standby
switch

Open
Close
(a)
(b)





AX-4030
4-7
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
2 Wearing protective gloves, grasp the test strips in 
the feeder, and take them out.
3 Wrap the test strips with tissue paper to protect the 
strips from dust.
  3    Clean inside of the feeder.
1 Blow dust off the roller using the blower brush.
• Carefully remove dust as much as possible from the 
loading slot shown in the right figure.
• Rotating the roller by hand, clean the internal 
surfaces entirely.
2 Load the test strips that were taken out in step  2  
- 2 back into the feeder.
3 Close the feeder cover (a). Turn the locking lever to 
lock the cover (b).
4 Clean the other feeder using the same procedure.

Loading slot

Feeder cover 
(b)
(a)





4-8
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.2.4    Cleaning the Test Strip Stopper
Particles from the test strips can accumulate on the test strip stopper located at the bottom of 
the feeders. This may cause running test strips to clog the stopper, consequently leading the 
measurement operation to stop with a trouble alert. Clean the test strip stopper every three days 
along with the feeders.
Prepare: Supplied blower brush, tissue paper, and protective gloves
IMPORTANT: Wear protective gloves when taking the test strips out of the feeders. Do not 
touch the pad area on the test strips with unprotected hands. Test strips contaminated 
with sebum may produce incorrect results.
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
  2    Take the test strips out of the feeder.
1 Wearing protective gloves, grasp the test strips in 
the feeder, and take them out.
• For detailed instructions, see step  2  on page 4-6.
2 Wrap the test strips with tissue paper to protect the 
strips from dust. 

Standby
switch





AX-4030
4-9
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  3    Open the covers.
1 Make sure both feeder covers are locked.
2 Open the maintenance cover.
3 Open the feeder protective cover.
• The cover stops at a 120° angle.
• This cover can be removed from the instrument by 
unhooking the hinge.
4 Open the side cover.
  4    Tilt the feeder unit down to the right. 
1 Tilt the feeder unit to the right.
• The feeder unit is locked with the latch shown with 
the circles in the figure. So, first you need to pull 
the whole feeder unit to the right with a little force 
to open the latch.
NOTE: Do not apply excessive pressure to the 
feeder unit when in the tilted position, as this may 
cause damage to the instrument.
  5    Clean the test strip stopper and roller.
1 Loosen the knurled screw on the test strip stopper.
2 Tilt the test strip stopper forward.

Feeder protective cover 
Feeder
covers
Side
cover
Maintenance cover 
2
3
4

Feeder
unit

Knurled screw
Test strip stopper





4-10
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
3 Slide the stopper in the direction of the arrow to 
remove it from the feeder unit.
NOTE: Be careful not to touch the nozzle while 
accessing the test strip stopper and roller.
4 Blow dust off the stopper using the blower brush.
5 Blow dust off the roller using the blower brush.
NOTE: The shaded area   in the right figure 
attracts particles from the test strips. Blow the 
dust off using the blower brush.
6 Insert the test strip stopper in the direction of the 
arrow to attach it to the feeder unit (a).
7 Close the stopper (b).

Test strip stopper

Roller

Test strip stopper
(a)
(b)





AX-4030
4-11
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
8 Tighten the knurled screw to lock the test strip 
stopper.
  6    Close the cover.
1 Stand the feeder unit straight up.
• Once the feeder is standing up straight, press the 
feeder downward until the latch clicks and the unit 
locks in place.
2 Close the side cover (a), feeder protective cover (b), 
and maintenance cover (c) in that order.

Knurled screw
Test strip stopper

Feeder
unit

Feeder
protective
cover
(a)
(b)
(c)
Side
cover
Maintenance cover 





4-12
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.2.5    Washing the Introduction Tray
Particles from the test strips can accumulate on the introduction tray inside the instrument. Wash 
and sterilize the tray thoroughly every three days. This maintenance task can also be done in 
the course of transport tray cleaning that should be performed once in a week. For instructions 
on cleaning the transport tray at the same time as the introduction tray, see “4.4.2 Washing the 
Transport Tray” on page 4-19.
Prepare:  Alcohol, cloth, and protective gloves, and sponge (soft enough to avoid scratching the 
tray)
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used cleaning tools and protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
NOTE: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents to wash the introduction trays. Do not 
subject the tray to ultrasonic cleaning. Inappropriate cleaning may deform or discolor the tray, 
possibly making it unusable.
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
  2    Open the covers.
1 Make sure both feeder covers are locked.
2 Open the maintenance cover.
3 Open the feeder protective cover.
• The cover stops at a 120° angle.
• This cover can be removed from the instrument by 
unhooking the hinge.
4 Open the side cover.

Standby
switch

Feeder protective cover 
Feeder
covers
Side
cover
Maintenance cover 
2
3
4





AX-4030
4-13
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  3    Tilt the feeder unit down to the right.
1 Tilt the feeder unit to the right.
• The feeder unit is locked with the latch shown with 
the circles in the figure. So, first you need to pull 
the whole feeder unit to the right with a little force 
to open the latch.
NOTE: Do not apply excessive pressure to the 
feeder unit when in the tilted position, as this may 
cause damage to the instrument.
  4    Remove the introduction tray.
1 Pull out the introduction tray about 20 mm in the 
direction of the arrow along the introduction arms.
2 Taking care not to hit the tray against the arms, lift 
the introduction tray up at an angle and remove the 
tray.
NOTE: Avoid strong impact to the introduction arms 
while removing the introduction tray. These arms 
are made of fragile materials.
NOTE: Be careful not to touch the nozzle while 
removing the introduction tray.
  5    Wash and sterilize the introduction tray.
1 Sterilize the introduction tray with alcohol.
2 Rinse the tray using a sponge to thoroughly remove 
dirt.
NOTE: Do not use hot water to rinse the tray, as it 
may deform the tray.
NOTE: Protect the tray from scratches, which may 
prevent smooth transportation of test strips.
NOTE: Some portions of the tray attract more dirt 
than others. Rinse the tray thoroughly until the 
whole tray is visually clean.
3 Use a cloth to wipe water off the tray, and allow it to dry.

Feeder
unit

Introduction arms
Introduction tray





4-14
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  6    Install the introduction tray.
1 Insert the introduction tray along the introduction 
arms in the grooves until the tray is sitting flat.
2 Slide the tray backward until the arrow marks are 
completely visible.
• Push the tray until you feel some resistance and hear 
a click.
NOTE: Be careful not to hit the introduction arms 
while installing the tray.
  7    Close the covers.
1 Stand the feeder unit straight up.
• Once the feeder is standing up straight, press the 
feeder downward until the latch clicks and the unit 
locks in place.
2 Close the side cover (a), feeder protective cover (b), 
and maintenance cover (c) in that order.

Introduction arms
Arrow marks

Feeder
unit

Feeder
protective
cover
(a)
(b)
(c)
Side
cover
Maintenance cover 





AX-4030
4-15
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Replacement of Consumables4.3
  4.3.1    Replacing the Washing Solution
When the instrument is getting low on washing solution, discard the remaining solution and refill 
the bottle with newly prepared solution. A maximum of about 600 measurements can be made 
with 2 L of washing solution. If warning “W003” occurs due to low washing solution, replace the 
solution immediately.
Prepare: Concentrated washing solution 3 (for AUTION MAX), purified water, and sealing film
NOTE: Do not try to replace the washing solution while the instrument is running. Replacement 
while in operation may produce incorrect measurement results or even cause trouble.
  1    Remove the washing solution bottle.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed.
2 Uncap the washing solution bottle, and discard the 
remaining solution.
3 Rinse the bottle with purified water to wash out old 
solution.
  2    Prepare new washing solution.
1 Dilute concentrated washing solution 3 with 
purified water.
NOTE: Check the correct dilution rate on the bottle 
label of the concentrated washing solution 3.
2 Pour the diluted washing solution into the washing 
solution bottle.
3 Seal the bottle with a piece of sealing film.
4 While holding the film in your hand, gently invert 
the bottle so as not to froth the solution.

Washing solution 
bottle cap

Concentrated washing 
solution 3
Purified water
1800 mL
200 mL
Example: To prepare 2000 mL of ten-fold 
                diluted washing solution

Sealing film





4-16
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  3    Install the washing solution bottle.
1 Remove the sealing film from the washing solution bottle.
2 Cap the bottle and place it where it was.





AX-4030
4-17
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  4.3.2    Replacing the Thermal Printer Paper
Red lines appear along both edges of the thermal printer paper when the paper is near the end of 
the roll. Replace the paper roll as soon as possible. If warning “W009” occurs because of a paper 
shortage, immediately load a new paper roll.
Prepare: Thermal printer paper
NOTE: Keep your hands away from the printer head to avoid damage to the printer.
  1    Take the old paper roll out of the printer.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed.
2 Press the printer cover button to open the cover.
3 Take the old paper roll from the printer.
  2    Load a new paper roll.
1 Orient a new paper roll so the paper can unroll from 
the bottom, and place it in the paper compartment. 
2 Pull out about 1 cm of paper from the printer cover 
when it closes.
3 Gently press the printer cover to close it.
REFERENCE: Paper extended from the cover 
can be cut at the paper cut slot. To advance the 
paper, press   on the operator panel.

3
 Remove the paper.
2
 Press the button.

About 1 cm of paper should 
extend from the cover.





4-18
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Regular Maintenance4.4
  4.4.1    Washing the Air Filter
The cooling fan of the instrument has an air filter that protects the internal mechanism from dust. 
Accumulation of dust in the filter results in decreased cooling efficiency.
Wash the filter once a month.
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
2 Wait until the cooling fan comes to a complete stop.
   Make sure the cooling fan stops 
completely before proceeding to the 
next step. Failure to do so may result 
in injury.
  2    Remove the air filter.
1 Pull the cooling fan cover toward you and remove it.
2 Remove the air filter.
  3    Wash the air filter.
1 Wash the filter thoroughly under running tap water 
to remove accumulated dust.
2 Gently wring out the filter to remove water. Dry the 
filter well.
3 Attach the air filter and cooling fan cover in their 
original positions.
NOTE: Replace the air filter if it becomes damaged 
or stains remain even after washing.

Cooling fan

Cooling fan cover
Air filter





AX-4030
4-19
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  4.4.2    Washing the Transport Tray
Particles from the test strips can accumulate and sample residue can crystallize on the transport 
tray as more urine tests are run. This may hinder smooth transportation of the test strips. Wash and 
sterilize the tray once a week to keep it clean. Introduction tray cleaning can also be done in the 
course of the following procedure.
Prepare: Alcohol, cloth, and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used cleaning tools and protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
IMPORTANT: Observe the instructions in this section when washing the transport tray. 
Improper procedures may misalign the tray from the designated position. This may 
hinder smooth transportation of the test strips, consequently producing incorrect 
results.
NOTE: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents to wash the transport and introduction trays. 
Do not subject the trays to ultrasonic cleaning. Inappropriate cleaning may deform or discolor 
the trays, possibly making it unusable.
  1    Move the nozzle.
Move the nozzle before performing the cleaning procedures.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 5 to go to the [Maintenance] screen.
3 Press 2 to go to the [Clean washing bath and tray] 
screen.

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

  Maintenance
  (5000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 S.G. cell washout
  2 Clean washing bath and tray
  3 Check measurement
  4 Maintenance information





4-20
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
• The nozzle will move to the designated position.
  2    Turn off the power.
1 Turn off the power when prompted. 
REFERENCE: Trouble “T290” occurs if you open 
the cover without turning off the power.
  3    Wash and sterilize the introduction tray.
1 Take the introduction tray out of the instrument and 
sterilize it.
• See steps  2  to  5  in “4.2.5 Washing the 
Introduction Tray” on page 4-12.
NOTE: The introduction and transport trays are 
similar in shape. It is recommended to wash the 
introduction tray first and keep it in another place. 
When washing the two trays at the same time, 
handle the trays with care not to confuse them.

  Clean washing bath and tray
  (5200)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Preparing for cleaning...
  Please wait...

  Clean washing bath and tray
  (5200)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Power off for cleaning.

Standby
switch





AX-4030
4-21
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4    Open the front cover.
1 Open the front cover to make the transportation 
section accessible.
  5    Take the transport tray out of the instrument.
1 Slightly slide the transport tray to the right to unlock 
the tray guide.
2 Slide the tray further to the right.
3 Taking care not to hit the tray against the 
surrounding components, pull the tray forward and 
out of the instrument. 
NOTE: Be careful not to touch the nozzle when 
removing the transport tray.
  6    Wash and sterilize the transport tray.
1 Sterilize the introduction tray with alcohol.
2 Rinse the tray using running water to thoroughly 
remove dirt.
NOTE: Do not use hot water to rinse the tray so as 
to avoid deformation.
NOTE: Protect the tray from scratches, which may 
prevent smooth transportation of test strips.
NOTE: The portions circled in the figure attract 
more dirt than others. Rinse the tray thoroughly 
until the whole tray is visually clean.
3 Wipe water off the tray with a cloth, and allow it to dry.

Front cover 

Tray guides





4-22
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  7    Install the transport tray.
1 Place the transport tray horizontally inside the 
instrument.
2 Insert the two tray guides into the slots at the left 
part of the tray, and slide the tray to the left.
• Press the tray until the tray is locked to the tray 
guides and a click is heard.
NOTE: Keep the tray horizontally while installing it. 
Do not insert the tray at a slant.
  8    Install the introduction tray.
1 Insert the introduction tray along the introduction 
arms in the grooves until the tray is sitting flat.
2 Slide the tray backward until the arrow marks are 
completely visible.
• Push the tray until you feel some resistance and hear 
a click
NOTE: Take care not to bend the introduction arms 
while installing the tray.

Tray guides

Introduction arms
Arrow marks





AX-4030
4-23
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  9    Close the cover.
1 Stand the feeder unit straight up.
• Once the feeder is standing up straight, press the 
feeder downward until the latch clicks and the unit 
locks in place.
2 Close the front cover (a), the side cover (b), feeder 
protective cover (c), and maintenance cover (d) in 
that order. 
3 If necessary, press the standby switch to turn on the 
power.

Feeder
unit

Feeder
protective
cover
Front cover 
(b)
(c)
(d)
(a)
Side
cover
Maintenance cover 





4-24
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  4.4.3    Cleaning the S.G. Cell
The S.G. cell and flow lines become contaminated with protein or other matter as more urine tests 
are run. Remove the dirt once a week. It takes about 5 minutes to complete the cleaning.
Prepare:  0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution (or commercially available detergent containing 
sodium hypochlorite of the same concentration) and sample tube
  1    Prepare a detergent.
1 Transfer 2 mL or more detergent into a sample tube.
2 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, and load 
the sample tube into the STAT port.
3 While pressing the “PUSH” mark, slide the STAT 
port backward and push it in place. Then, gently 
pull the port out to make sure the port is locked with 
the stopper.
  2    Flush the S.G. cell.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 5 to go to the [Maintenance] screen.

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back

Detergent
Min. 2 mL
Min. 
40 mm

PUSH
STAT port





AX-4030
4-25
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
3 Press 1 to go to the [S.G. cell washout] screen.
4 Press  Start   to start washing.
• During S.G. cell washout, the remaining time before 
completion is displayed.
REFERENCE: If warning “W002” occurs 
The sample tube containing the detergent may be 
incorrectly placed in the STAT port. Load the tube 
correctly, and press    OK    to clear the warning.
REFERENCE: To stop washout 
Press   Stop   . The instrument will flush the flow 
lines, and displays the [Maintenance] screen 
again.
  3    When washout is completed…
• The end process will automatically start, and then 
the [Maintenance] screen will appear again.
• Press Go back  twice on the [Maintenance] screen to 
return to the standby screen.

  Maintenance
  (5000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 S.G. cell washout
  2 Clean washing bath and tray
  3 Check measurement
  4 Maintenance information

  S.G. cell washout
  (5100)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Set washing solution in STAT port.
                     Start    Go back

  S.G. cell washout
  (5100)             2006-01-09  11:03
  Washing...
  Please wait...
              5'00

  S.G. cell washout
  (5100)             2006-01-09  11:08
  S.G. cell washout ending.
  Please wait...





4-26
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
1 Press the “PUSH” mark on the STAT port 
backward to unlock the stopper, and then slide the 
port toward you.
2 Take the sample tube out of the STAT port.
  4.4.4    Cleaning the Washing Bath
The washing bath becomes contaminated as more urine tests are run. Clean the washing bath at 
least once a month or when the washing bath looks seriously contaminated.
Prepare: Purified water, cotton swabs, and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used cleaning tools and protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Move the nozzle.
Move the nozzle to make enough room for you to access the washing bath.
1 On the standby screen, press   Menu   to go to the 
[Main menu] screen.
2 Press 5 to go to the [Maintenance] screen.

PUSH

  
  Menu    Meas No.   Strip    S.G. Cal

  Main menu
  (0000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 Parameter settings
  2 Results
  3 Initial settings
  4 Print
  5 Maintenance
  
  
  
  
                              Go back





AX-4030
4-27
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
3 Press 2 to go to the [Clean washing bath and tray] 
screen.
• The nozzle will move to the designated position.
  2    Turn off the power.
1 Press the standby switch to turn off the power when 
prompted.
REFERENCE: Trouble “T290” will occur if the cover 
is opened with the power on.
  3    Open the front cover.
1 Open the front cover.

  Maintenance
  (5000)             2006-01-09  11:00
  1 S.G. cell washout
  2 Clean washing bath and tray
  3 Check measurement
  4 Maintenance information

  Clean washing bath and tray
  (5200)             2006-01-09  11:02
  Preparing for cleaning...
  Please wait...

  Clean washing bath and tray
  (5200)             2006-01-09  11:03
  Power off for cleaning.

Standby
switch

Front cover 





4-28
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4    Clean the washing bath.
1 Wipe dirt off inside the washing bath and port using 
cotton swabs moistened with purified water.
• Pay additional attention when cleaning the two level 
detection sensors in the washing port.
NOTE: Do not touch the nozzle while cleaning the 
washing bath and port.
NOTE: After cleaning, check inside the washing 
bath and port for lint or other dust, which may 
cause the flow line filter to clog.
  5    Close the cover and turn on the power.
1 Close the front cover.
2 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• Allow the instrument to warm up.
• The nozzle will automatically return to its home 
position.

Washing port
Level detection sensors
(Clean with great care.)
Washing bath

Standby
switch
Front cover 





AX-4030
4-29
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.4.5    Replacing the Washing Solution Filter
The nozzle of the washing solution bottle has a stainless steel filter. A clogged filter may cause 
trouble with the flow line system. Replace the filter with a new one once a month.
Prepare: Washing solution filter (supplied as “filter set”) and tweezers
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
  2    Replace the washing solution filter.
1 Turn the filter holder by hand to disassemble it, and 
remove the filter with tweezers.
2 Fit a new filter into the recess of the filter holder.
NOTE: The washing solution filter is easily 
deformed. Handle the filter with care.
3 Screw the filter holder in to assemble it.
  3    Check for leaks.
1 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
2 During warm-up, check the filter holder connection 
for leaks.
• If a leak is found, tighten the filter holder securely.
3 Make sure the standby screen appears.

Standby
switch

Filter holder
Washing solution 
filter

Check for leaks.





4-30
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.4.6    Replacing the Drain Pinch Valve Tubes
The tubes of the drain pinch valves wear out during long periods of use. If you find the tubes 
leaking, replace them with new ones. If trouble “T280” occurs due to leaks, replace the tubes 
immediately.
Prepare: Replacing tube (silicone tube, I.D. 2 mm×O.D. 4 mm – L 100 mm) and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used cleaning tools and protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
  2    Open the covers.
1 Open the maintenance cover.
2 Open the feeder protective cover.
• The cover stops at a 120° angle.
• This cover can be removed from the instrument by 
unhooking the hinge.
3 Open the side cover.

Standby
switch

Feeder
protective
cover
Side
cover
1
2
3
Maintenance cover 





AX-4030
4-31
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  3    Replace the tubes.
1 Unhook the tubes.
2 Disconnect both ends of the tube from the joints.
• One end should be removed from a T-joint.
3 Connect both ends of a new tube to the joints.
4 Feed the tube through the backward hook.
NOTE: The drain pinch 
valve has two hooks. 
The tube must pass 
through the backward 
hook.
  4    Close the covers.
1 Close the side cover (a), feeder protective cover (b), 
and maintenance cover (c) in that order.
NOTE: After replacing the tubes, check trouble 
“T280” does not occur at the next startup. If it 
occurs, check the bottom of the instrument and 
drain tube connections for leaks. If there is a leak, 
secure the connections.

Replaceable tubes

T-joint

Backward hook

Feeder
protective
cover
(a)
(b)
(c)
Side
cover
Maintenance cover 





4-32
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.4.7    Replacing the White Plate
If the white plate in the optical system is contaminated, incorrect measurement results may be 
obtained. If warning “W007” occurs, replace the white plate with a new one.
Prepare: White plate and tweezers
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
  2    Remove the white plate cover.
1 Open the front cover.
2 Remove the white plate cover.
• Use the Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two 
screws on the cover, and slide the cover up to 
remove it.
  3    Move the optical block.
1 Slide the optical block backward by hand to make 
enough room for you to access the white plate.
2 Remove the black sticker.

Standby
switch

Remove the screws.
White plate 
cover

Optical block
Black sticker





AX-4030
4-33
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4    Remove the old white plate.
1 Slowly pull out the old white plate with a pair of 
tweezers.
  5    Insert a new white plate.
1 Take a new white plate out of the bag with the 
tweezers and, without resting it anywhere, slowly 
insert the plate into the slot.
• Feed the plate through the guides at the entrance 
and halfway point, as far as it can go.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the white plate with 
unprotected hands. Touching the plate can 
contaminate the surface with sebum, whereby 
producing incorrect results.
2 Attach the black sticker to cover the opening.
3 Attach the white plate cover.
• Ensure the cover is inserted in the slit (between the 
two plates).
• Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws.
  6    Close the cover and turn on the power.
1 Close the front cover.
2 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• Allow the instrument to warm up.
• The optical block will automatically return to its 
home position.
  7    Perform check measurement.
1 Measure the check strips to make sure you can obtain correct results.
• See “2.7 Check Measurement” on page 2-43.

White plate

Guides
Viewed from the top
Feed the plate 
through the guides 
until it stops.

Standby
switch
Front cover 





4-34
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.5.1    Preparing the Instrument Before Long Periods of Disuse
When you intend not to use the instrument for a week or more, use the procedure below to clean 
each section. Failure to do that can cause fluid remaining in the flow lines to crystallize and 
consequently damage the instrument.
Prepare:  0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution (or commercially available detergent diluted 
appropriately), sample tube, cotton swabs, purified water, alcohol, blower brush, tissue 
paper, and protective gloves
  Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes.
   Discard used cleaning tools and protective gloves in accordance with local 
regulations for biohazardous waste.
  1    Wash the S.G. cell.
1 Wash the S.G. cell.
• See “4.4.3 Cleaning the S.G. Cell” on page 4-24.
• Keep the power on after the completion of the washout.
  2    Clean the washing bath.
1 Clean the washing bath.
• See “4.4.4 Cleaning the Washing Bath” on page 4-26.
  3    Flush the flow lines.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.

Standby
switch

Before/After Long Periods of Disuse4.5





AX-4030
4-35
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
2 Uncap the washing solution bottle and discard the 
remaining solution.
3 Rinse the bottle with purified water.
4 Fill the bottle with purified water and cap it.
5 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• During warm-up, the instrument will aspirate the 
purified water to fill the flow lines.
  4    Clean the components.
1 Clean the feeders.
• See “4.2.3 Cleaning the Feeders” on page 4-6.
2 Clean the waste box. 
• See “4.2.1 Cleaning the Waste Box” on page 4-3.
3 Wash the introduction and transport trays.
• See “4.4.2 Washing the Transport Tray” on page 
4-19.
  5    Discharge the purified water from the flow lines.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
2 Uncap the washing solution bottle.
• Place the cap on tissue paper to protect it against 
dust.
3 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• During warm-up, purified water will be discharged 
from the flow lines.

Fill the bottle 
with purified water

Cap





4-36
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  6    Turn off the power.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed, then 
press the standby switch to turn off the power.
2 Press the OFF side of the main power switch to turn 
off the main power.
  7    Discard the purified water from the washing solution bottle.
1 Uncap the washing solution bottle and discard the water.
2 Cap the washing solution bottle.
  8    Discard liquid waste.
1 Discard the liquid waste in the drain bottle. Wash 
and sterilize the bottle and place it where it was.
• See “4.2.2 Discarding Liquid Waste from the Drain 
Bottle” on page 4-5.
  9    Unplug the power cord.
1 Pull out the power cord from the receptacle.
REFERENCE: The type of power cord supplied 
varies depending on the country.

Standby
switch
ON
OFF
Main power
switch (rear) 

Power cord
Receptacle





AX-4030
4-37
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
D
  4.5.2    Starting the Instrument Up After Long Periods of Disuse
Use the following procedure to start up the instrument after 1 week or more of disuse.
Prepare: Concentrated washing solution 3 (for AUTION MAX), and purified water
  1    Fill the washing solution bottle with the washing solution.
1 Prepare the washing solution and transfer it to the 
washing solution bottle.
• See “4.3.1 Replacing the Washing Solution” on 
page 4-15.
  2    Turn on the power.
1 Plug the power cord into an AC receptacle.
2 Press the ON side of the main power switch.
3 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• During warm-up, the instrument will fill the flow 
lines with washing solution.
  3    Load the test strips.
1 Make sure the standby screen is displayed.
2 Load the test strips into the feeders.
• See “2.3.3 Loading Test Strips into the Feeders” on 
page 2-16.
IMPORTANT: The quality of the test strips in 
the feeders is ensured for three days. Using 
the strips left in the feeders for longer periods 
may produce incorrect results.

Concentrated washing 
solution 3
Purified water
1800 mL
200 mL
Example: To prepare 2000 mL of ten-fold 
                diluted washing solution

Standby
switch
ON
OFF
Main power
switch (rear) 





4-38
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL





AX-4030
5-1
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
G
Troubleshooting
5.1  When a Warning Occurs ..........................................5-2
  5.1.1  From Warning Generation to Remedy .........
5-2
  5.1.2  Causes and Remedies .................................
5-3
  W001 – W003 ............5-3  W004 – W009 .............5-4
  W010 – W011 ............
5-5
5.2  When an Error Occurs .............................................5-6
  5.2.1  From Error Generation to Remedy ..............
5-6
  5.2.2  Causes and Remedies .................................
5-7
  E101 – E104 ..............5-7  E110 – E120 ...............5-8
  E130 – E140 ..............
5-9
5.3  When Trouble Occurs ............................................5-10
  5.3.1  From Trouble Generation to Remedy ........5-10
  5.3.2  Causes and Remedies ...............................5-11
  T999, T201 – T203 ... 5-11  T210 – T220 .............5-12
  T221 – T222 ............. 5-13  T223 – T240 .............5-14
  T241 – T261 ............. 5-15  T270 – T290 .............5-16
5.4  Measurement-Related Messages ..........................5-17
  5.4.1   Results-Related Errors (Printed Results 
Reports: on the lowest line) .......................5-17
  No sample ................ 5-17  Skipped .....................5-17
  Reflection light intensity drift ..........................................5-17
  Excess reflectivity ...........................................................5-18
  Test strip out-of-position .................................................5-18
  Abnormal sampling ........................................................5-18
  5.4.2  S.G. Measurement-Related Errors  
    (Printed Results Report: S.G.)  ..................5-19
  UNDER ....................5-19  OVER .......................5-19
  --------- ......................5-19  CAL. ERR .................5-19
  5.4.3  Turbidity Measurement-Related Errors  
    (Printed Results Report: TURB)  ................
5-20
  CAL. ERR ................. 5-20  ERROR .....................5-20
  5.4.4  Messages on the Abnormal Results List ....5-20
  Barcode misread ...... 5-20  No sample ................5-20
  Measurement error ... 5-21  Abnormal data ..........5-21
  Positive sample ........ 5-21
  S.G. measurement error ................................................5-21
  Turbidity measurement error ..........................................5-21
5.5  If This Happens .......................................................5-22
  5.5.1   If the Instrument Does Not Start Up 
 
(Replacing Fuses)  .....................................
5-22
Chapter
5





5-2
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
When a Warning Occurs5.1
A warning occurs when the instrument is asking you to take action to enable measurement of more 
samples. For example, you may be requested to add test strips or to dispose of used test strips. 
You will be notified of warnings by beeps, and can determine the causes by a displayed warning 
code, message, and graphic icon. If running measurement halts due to a warning, you can manually 
resume the tests after clearing the cause. No samples are skipped.
  5.1.1    From Warning Generation to Remedy
This section describes the procedure from how you will be notified of a warning until how you can 
clear it.
1 While measurement is in progress, a “graphic 
icon” will appear to notify you that a warning has 
occurred.
• Sample aspiration will be suspended.
• The instrument will wait for the ongoing 
measurement to complete if there are test strips 
reacting with samples inside.
2 Consecutive short beeps sound for about 10 
seconds, and a warning code appears along with a 
message.
• If a warning occurs while on standby, the 
instrument will be brought to this status 
immediately.
3 Check the warning code and message, and take the necessary action to remove the cause.
• See “5.1.2 Causes and Remedies” on page 5-3.
4 Press    OK    .
5 If measurement was in progress, you will be asked whether to resume the sample tests or not. To 
resume the tests, press Continue . To cancel them, press   Stop   .
6 If the warning persists, turn off the power and contact your distributor.

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:10
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0150
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
Results               Stop
Icon

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:10
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0150
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1:10EA
             OK
      
W:001
  The feeder has run out of test 
  strips. Load new strips to 
  continue.
Warning code ("W" and 3-digit number) and message

Tee-tee-tee, tee-tee-tee





AX-4030
5-3
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  5.1.2    Causes and Remedies
   Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes before 
any operation that may expose you to samples.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
NOTE: If a warning occurs during measurement, you will be asked whether to continue the 
sample tests or not. Select Continue to measure the remaining samples, and   Stop   to cancel 
the tests.
W001 The feeder has run out of test strips.
Load new strips to continue.
Cause The feeder has run out of test strips.
Remedy Add new test strips to the feeder.
                    ↓
Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.
W002 The STAT port is empty.
Set a sample as explained in the operating manual and try again.
Cause There is no sample in the STAT port, or the sample is incorrectly placed in the STAT port.
Remedy Place the sample in the STAT port correctly (see page 2-27).
                    ↓
Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.
W003 The washing solution has run out. 
Add fresh washing solution to continue.
Cause 1. The washing solution bottle is empty.
2.  The liquid sensor of the washing solution bottle is not working correctly because the bottle is 
uncapped or the liquid sensor cord is disconnected from the instrument.
Remedy 1.  Discard the remaining washing solution and add newly prepared solution to the bottle (see 
page 4-15).
                    ↓
    Press 
   OK    to clear the warning. 
2.  Connect one end of the liquid sensor cord to the cap of the washing solution bottle, and cap 
the bottle. Connect the other end of the cord to the washing solution sensor terminal “S” on 
the rear of the instrument (see page 1-27).
                    ↓
    Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.





5-4
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

W004 The waste box is full; empty the box.
Or, strips cannot drop in the box; fit the box in the tray correctly and close the 
tray.
Cause 1. The waste box is full of used test strips.
2. The waste box is not installed correctly or the waste box tray is open.
Remedy 1. Pull out the waste box tray and discard the used test strips (see page 4-3).
                    ↓
    Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.
2. Install the waste box correctly and close the waste box tray (see page 1-29).
                    ↓
    Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.
W005 The rack unloading side is full. 
Remove racks.
Cause The unloading side of the sampler is full of the sample racks.
Remedy Take the sample racks out of the unloading side.
                    ↓
Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.
W006 Close the feeder cover.
Cause The feeder cover was opened while measurement is in progress.
Remedy Close the feeder cover.
                    ↓
Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.
W007 Replace the white plate to adjust LED intensity, and then cancel this warning.
Cause The white plate in the optical unit is dirty or has deteriorated.
Remedy Replace the white plate with a new one (see page 4-32).
                    ↓
Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.
W008 The test strip type for the selected feeder is not specified.
Press [Continue] to use test strips in the main feeder.
Cause The feeder assigned to this item rack is disabled because the test strip setting was not made for 
the feeder.
Remedy
To use the test strips in the main feeder, press Continue . Press   Stop   to cancel the tests.
To use the other feeder, set the type of test strips for that feeder by key operation (see page 
2-16).
 
W009 Printer paper has run out. Load new paper.
*  The icon shown at left appears when W009 occurs during measurement but it does 
not appear while on standby.
Cause The thermal printer paper has run out, or is not loaded correctly.
Remedy Load the printer paper correctly (see page 4-17).
                    ↓
Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.





AX-4030
5-5
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
W010 Measurement cannot start. Perform S.G. calibration to enable measurement.
Cause The existing S.G. calibration result was invalidated after the specified period of time elapsed 
since the last calibration.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the warning.
                    ↓
Perform S.G. calibration to update the result (see page 2-34), and retry the tests.
W011 The test strips are not sent out of the feeder correctly.
To continue measurement, mix the test strips in the feeder.
Cause Several test strips are trapped inside the feeder or sticking together.
Remedy Mix the test strips in the feeder.
                    ↓
Press 
   OK    to clear the warning.





5-6
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
An error occurs when there is something wrong with the power unit, memory, connections, or 
parameter settings. You will be notified of errors by beeps, and can determine the causes by 
displayed error codes. The ongoing measurement ceases if an error occurs. You can still obtain the 
results of samples that have already been aspirated. However, after remedying the error, you need 
to run the tests again on the samples that could not be measured due to the error.
  5.2.1    From Error Generation to Remedy
This section describes the procedure from how you will be notified of an error until you clear it.
1 While measurement is in progress, the message 
“Error/trouble occurred” appears to notify you that 
an error (or trouble) has occurred.
• Sample aspiration will cease.
• The instrument will wait for the ongoing 
measurement to complete if there are test strips 
reacting with samples.
2 Consecutive short beeps sound for about 10 seconds 
and an error code appears on the screen.
• If an error occurs while on standby, the instrument 
will be brought to in this status immediately.
3 Check the error code and press    OK    to stop the beeping.
4 Take the necessary action to clear the error.
• See “5.2.2 Causes and Remedies” on page 5-7.
5 Run the tests on the samples that could not be measured due to the error.
6 If the error persists, turn off the power and contact your distributor.
REFERENCE: For information on printed lists of error codes reported when an error occurs, see 
“2.8.4 Error and Trouble List” on page 2-54. For information on lists of errors and troubles that 
have occurred so far, see “2.8.5 Trouble List” on page 2-55 and “3.5.1 Printing a Trouble List” 
on page 3-23.

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:10
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0001
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
        Error/trouble occurred

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:10
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0001
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1:10EA
             OK
      
E:102
Error code ("E" and 3-digit number)

Tee-tee-tee, tee-tee-tee
When an Error Occurs5.2





AX-4030
5-7
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  5.2.2    Causes and Remedies
   Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes before 
any operation that may expose you to samples.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
E101 Version change
Cause The main ROM was exchanged before the instrument was turned on.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the error.
E102 Power down
Cause The instrument was accidentally turned off during measurement.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
Allow the instrument to warm-up. When the instrument puts itself on standby, retry testing the 
remaining samples.
E103 Battery voltage error
Cause The backup battery naturally discharged while the instrument was not in use for several days.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
Keep the instrument powered on for at least 25 hours to charge the battery.
                    ↓
Set the system clock correctly (see page 3-17).
E104 Backup data error
Cause The backup data was corrupted.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
Keep the instrument powered on for at least 25 hours to charge the battery.
                    ↓
Set the system clock correctly (see page 3-17).





5-8
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

E110 Test strip pads error
Cause 1. The setting of test strip type is wrong.
2. The feeder contains two or more types of test strips.
3. The test strips were not transported correctly.
4. The transport tray is dirty.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
    Make the correct setting for the type of test strips loaded into the feeder (see page 2-16).
2. Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
     Open the feeder cover and remove the wrong types of test strips from the feeder, if there are 
any.
3. Press 
   OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
    Load the test strips into the feeder correctly (see page 2-17).
4. Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
    Clean the transport tray (see page 4-19).
E120 S.G. calibration failure
Cause 1. No sample rack was placed in the sampler.
2. The low and high solutions are not loaded in the appropriate ports of the sample rack.
3. The volume of S.G. standard solution in the sample tubes is insufficient.
4. The S.G. standard solutions are inadequate in specific gravity value.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
     Correctly place the sample rack containing the S.G. standard solutions in the sampler, and 
retry S.G. calibration (see page 2-35).
2. Press 
   OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
     Correctly place the low solution in port 1, and the high solution in port 2 on the sample rack. 
Then, retry S.G. calibration (see page 2-35).
3. Press 
   OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
     Ensure both of the sample tubes contain at least 2 mL of S.G. standard solution each, and 
retry S.G. calibration (see page 2-34).
4. Press 
   OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
    Prepare S.G. standard solutions of proper S.G. values, and retry S.G. calibration.





AX-4030
5-9
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
E130 Two-way communication error
Cause The communication cable is not connected correctly to the external device.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
Securely connect the communication cable to both the instrument and host.
E140 Test strip marker error
Cause The test strip type detected from the strip marker and the test strip type setting do not match.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the error.
                    ↓
Make the correct setting for the type of test strips loaded into the feeder (see page 2-16).
                    ↓
Check the feeder contains the correct type of test strips, and remove the wrong types of test 
strips, if there are any.





5-10
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
B
Trouble occurs when the instrument encounters a serious problem with the ROM, optical unit, 
driving section or other hardware components. You will be notified of troubles by beeps and can 
determine the causes by the displayed trouble codes. 
The ongoing measurement usually ceases if trouble occurs. So, after remedying the trouble, you 
need to run the tests again on the samples that could not be measured due to the trouble. As for the 
samples that have already reacted with reagent on the strips, the instrument tries to output as many 
results as possible. For example, in the case of nozzle drive trouble “T240”, you will miss the result 
of the sample that was just aspirated (before being dropped on a strip), but can obtain the results 
of currently reacting samples. This means you should retry to measure the sample that was just 
aspirated and later samples.
  5.3.1    From Trouble Generation to Remedy
This section describes the procedure from trouble notification to remedy.
1 While measurement is in progress, the message 
“Error/trouble occurred” appears to notify you that 
trouble (or an error) has occurred.
• The instrument will cease operations.
• For some troubles, the instrument will wait for the 
ongoing measurement to complete if one or more 
test strips inside are still under reaction.
2 Two different long tones sound in turn for about 1 
minute, and a trouble code appears on screen.
• If trouble occurs while on standby, the instrument 
will be brought to this status immediately.
3 Check the trouble code and press    OK    to stop the beeping.
• The message “Initializing…” will appear, and the mechanical sections will be initialized.
4 Take the appropriate action to solve the problem. Or, turn off the power and contact your 
distributor.
• For more information, see “5.3.2 Causes and Remedies” on page 5-11.

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:10
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0001
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1: 9EB
        Error/trouble occurred

  Measuring...
                     2006-01-09  11:10
  Port No.
                                0001
  Measurement No.
                                0001
  ID
                  ------------------
  Test strip type
                              1:10EA
             OK
      
T:201
Trouble code ("T" and 3-digit number)

Tee-too-tee-too
When Trouble Occurs5.3





AX-4030
5-11
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
5 Run the tests on the samples that could not be measured due to the trouble.
6 If the trouble persists, turn off the power and contact your distributor.
REFERENCE: For information on the printed list of trouble codes reported when trouble occurs, 
see “2.8.4 Error and Trouble List” on page 2-54. For information on the printed list of errors and 
troubles that have occurred so far, see “2.8.5 Trouble List” on page 2-55 and “3.5.1 Printing a 
Trouble List” on page 3-23.
  5.3.2    Causes and Remedies
   Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes before 
any operation which may expose you to samples.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
T999 Unknown trouble
Cause A system failure occurred.
Remedy Take notes of what appears on the screen, and contact your distributor.
T201 Data ROM trouble
Cause 1. The main ROM (version) has been upgraded. 
2. Trouble occurred in the flash ROM that stores the parameter settings.
Remedy
1 and 2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
T202 Internal communication trouble
Cause Internal communication trouble(s) occurred.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
T203 No calibration curve
Cause The calibration curve is not set for the test strip, or the calibration curve information is 
incomplete.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.





5-12
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

T210 Test strip introduction section drive trouble
Cause 1. The transport tray or introduction tray is not installed correctly.
2. The test strips cannot be transported because the transport section is dirty or obstructed.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Install the tray correctly (see pages 4-12 or 4-19).
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Clean the dirty transport tray, or remove the obstacles, if there are any.
T211 Test strip transport section drive trouble
Cause 1. The waste box is overflowing with used test strips.
2. The transport section did not work correctly.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Pull out the waste box and discard the used test strips (see page 4-3).
                   ↓
    Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section.
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
     Check the test strip transport section. If the section is damaged, turn off the power and 
contact your distributor.
T212 Test strip identification section drive trouble
Cause The test strip flip section of the feeder is clogged with test strips.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Remove the clogged test strips from the feeder.
T220 Optical unit drive trouble
Cause 1. The transport tray is not installed correctly.
2.  The waste box is overflowing with used test strips that are blocking the measurement light 
and the optical unit movement.
3. Trouble occurred in the optical unit.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Install the transport tray correctly (see page 4-19).
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Pull out the waste box and discard the used test strips (see page 4-3).
3. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
     Check the optical block. Remove the test strips that are blocking movement. If the optical 
block is damaged, turn off the power and contact your distributor.
                   ↓
    Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section.





AX-4030
5-13
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
T221 A/D overflow
Cause 1. The transport tray is not installed correctly.
2.  The waste box is overflowing with used test strips that are blocking the measurement light 
and the optical unit movement.
3. The test strip was not placed correctly in the optical unit.
4. The white plate is dirty.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Install the transport tray correctly (see page 4-19).
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Pull out the waste box and discard the used test strips (see page 4-3).
                   ↓
     Remove the test strips or other obstacles that are blocking the measurement light and the 
optical unit movement.
3. Press 
   OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Install the transport tray correctly.
                   ↓
     Remove the obstacles that are blocking the measurement light and the optical unit 
movement.
                   ↓
    Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section.
4. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
     Replace the white plate with a new one (see page 4-32), and perform a check measurement 
(see page 2-43).
T222 Optical unit trouble
Cause 1. The white plate is dirty.
2. The test strip was not transported correctly.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
     Replace the white plate with a new one (see page 4-32), and perform a check measurement 
(see page 2-43).
2. Press 
   OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section.





5-14
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

T223 Optical unit undetected marker
Cause 1. The transport tray is not installed correctly.
2.  The test strips could not be transported to the optical unit. Or the test strips could not be 
placed on the optical unit correctly.
3.  The waste box is overflowing with used test strips that are blocking the measurement light 
and the optical unit movement.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Install the transport tray correctly (see page 4-19).
                   ↓
    Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section.
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Remove the test strips scattered on the analysis section.
3. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Pull out the waste box and discard the used test strips (see page 4-3).
T230 Feeder drive trouble
Cause 1.  Damaged or wrong type of test strips are loaded in the feeder. Or, test strip waste has 
accumulated in the feeder.
2. The feeder did not work correctly.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Remove the clogged test strips from the feeder and clean the feeder (see page 4-6).
                   ↓
    Load the specified type of new test strips into the feeder, and retry measurement.
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Check the feeder. If the feeder is damaged, turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
T240 Nozzle drive trouble
Cause The nozzle did not work correctly.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Make sure the instrument is not in operation, then open the front cover.
                   ↓
Check the nozzle. If the nozzle is damaged, turn off the power, and contact your distributor.





AX-4030
5-15
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
T241 Sampling trouble
Cause 1.  Consecutive sample containers had an insufficient volume of sample: less than 2 mL or a 
level lower than 40 mm.
2.  The sample container in the STAT port has an insufficient volume of washing solution for 
cleaning the S.G. cell.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
     Make sure the sample tubes each contain at least 2 mL of sample and the sample level is at 
least 40 mm above the bottom of the tube, and retry measurement.
2. Press 
   OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
     Make sure the sample tube contains at least 2 mL of washing solution and the liquid level is 
at least 40 mm above the bottom of the tube, and retry cleaning operation.
T250 S.G. hydrometer trouble
Cause The S.G. hydrometer is not connected correctly.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
T251 Turbidimeter trouble
Cause The turbid/Hb/color cell is dirty, or the tubing is clogged.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Wash the S.G. cell (see page 4-24).
T252 Tintometer trouble
Cause The turbid/Hb/color cell is dirty, or the tubing is clogged.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Wash the S.G. cell (see page 4-24).
T260 Washing solution pump trouble
Cause The washing solution pump did not work correctly.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
T261 Sampling pump trouble
Cause The sampling pump did not work correctly.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.





5-16
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

T270 Measurement lever drive trouble
Cause 1. A sample rack was forced into the sampler.
2. The measurement- or return-side lever of the sampler did not work correctly.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Take the sample racks out of the sampler.
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Check the sampler. If the sampler is damaged, turn off the power and contact your distributor.
T271 Return lever drive trouble
Cause 1. A sample rack was forced into the sampler.
2. The measurement- or return-side lever of the sampler did not work correctly.
Remedy
1. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Take the sample racks out of the sampler.
2. Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
    Check the sampler. If the sampler is damaged, turn off the power and contact your distributor.
T272 Loading side full
Cause Another rack was added to the loading side when the sampler was fully loaded with 5 racks.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Take the sample racks out of the loading side of the sampler.
T280 Overflow
Cause An overflow has occurred, or the tubing is detached.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Check the drain pinch valves. Replace the damaged tubes with new ones (see page 4-30).
                   ↓
Check to see if tubing is disconnected.
T290 Cover open
Cause The front cover, maintenance cover, side cover, or feeder protective cover is open.
Remedy
Press    OK    to clear the trouble.
                   ↓
Ensure all the covers are closed.





AX-4030
5-17
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Measurement-Related Messages5.4
This section lists the messages that can possibly appear on the printed results reports and abnormal 
results lists when incorrect results are obtained.
  5.4.1    Results-Related Errors (Printed Results Reports: on the lowest line)
The instrument cannot produce any results when measuring abnormal samples such as drug-
administered or dense turbid urine. In such a case, an appropriate error message is added to the end 
of the results reports (see page 2-50). See the table below to solve the problem. If the error persists, 
turn off the power and contact your distributor.
   Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes before 
any operation that may expose you to samples.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
No sample
Description No sample was detected.
Cause The sample tube is empty.
Remedy Ensure the sample tube contains at least 2 mL of sample, and the sample level is 40 mm 
above the bottom of the tube.
                   ↓
Retry measurement.
Skipped
Description The sample was not measured.
Cause 1. The host instructs the instrument not to measure the sample.
2. The sample tube is not labeled with a barcode, or the label is too dirty to read.
3. The barcode is labeled out of position.
4. The built-in barcode reader is out of order.
Remedy 1. There is no problem with the instrument.
2. Newly label the sample tube, and retry measurement.
3. Reattach the label in the correct position and retry measurement.
4. Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
Reflection light intensity drift
Description Light intensity varied during measurement.
Cause Outside light is penetrating the optical block.
Remedy Install the waste box correctly (see page 1-29), and retry measurement.





5-18
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

Excess reflectivity
Description The reflectivity for a measurement item exceeded 120%.
* The result will be obtained regardless of this error.
Cause 1. The instrument measured a test strip other than that set by key operation.
2. The instrument measured an abnormal sample (e. g. drug-administered urine).
Remedy 1.  Make the correct settings for the type of test strips to be loaded into the feeder (see page 
2-16).
                   ↓
    Load the correct test strips into the feeder (see page 2-18).
                   ↓
    Measure the sample again.
2. Check to see if the sample is of acceptable quality for the instrument.
                   ↓
    If the sample is acceptable, retry measurement.
Test strip out-of-position
Description The test strip is placed out of the correct position.
Cause The test strip was not properly positioned in the optical unit.
Remedy Pull out the waste box tray and discard the used test strips (see page 4-3).
                   ↓
Make sure the instrument is not in operation, then press the standby switch to turn off the 
power.
                   ↓
Pull out the transport tray.
                   ↓
Remove test strips scattered around.
                   ↓
Attach the transport tray and close the covers.
                   ↓
Press the standby switch to turn on the power, and retry measurement.
Abnormal sampling
Description The nozzle could not drop the sample on the test strip.
Cause 1. The sample is unacceptable to the instrument (e. g. drug-administered urine).
2. Trouble occurred in the flow lines.
3. The liquid sensor of the washing solution bottle is damaged.
Remedy 1. Check to see if the sample is acceptable to the instrument.
                   ↓
    If the sample is an acceptable kind of urine, retry measurement.
2.  Make sure the instrument is not in operation, then press the standby switch to turn off the 
power.
                   ↓
    Check the flow lines and washing solution filter for clogging or leaks.
                   ↓
    Press the standby switch to turn on the power, and retry measurement.
3. Check to see if the washing solution bottle contains a sufficient volume of solution.
                   ↓
     If “W003” does not occur though the washing solution bottle is empty, turn off the power 
and contact your distributor.





AX-4030
5-19
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  5.4.2    S.G. Measurement-Related Errors (Printed Results Report: S.G.)
This section lists the error messages that may be added below the “S.G.” line of the printed results 
report (see page 2-50) if incorrect S.G. results are obtained. When you encounter a message of this 
kind, see the table below to solve the problem. If the error persists, turn off the power and contact 
your distributor.
   Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes before 
any operation that may expose you to samples.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
UNDER The S.G. cell is dirty.
Cause The result obtained from S.G. measurement is lower than the allowable range.
Remedy Wash the S.G. cell (see page 4-24).
                   ↓
Retry measuring the sample.
OVER The S.G. cell is dirty.
Cause The result obtained from S.G. measurement is higher than the allowable range.
Remedy Wash the S.G. cell (see page 4-24).
                   ↓
Retry measuring the sample.
--------- The S.G. was not measured.
Cause The S.G. measurement was not made for some reason.
Remedy Eliminate the cause.
                   ↓
Retry measuring the sample.
CAL. ERR S.G. calibration has not been made.
Cause S.G. calibration has not been performed.
Remedy Perform S.G. calibration (see page 2-34).





5-20
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL

  5.4.3   
Turbidity Measurement-Related Errors (Printed Results Report: TURB)
This section lists the error messages that may be added to the “TURB” line on the printed results 
reports when incorrect turbidity results are obtained. See the tables below to solve the problem. If 
the error persists, contact your distributor.
CAL. ERR
Cause The result obtained from turbidity measurement is outside the specified range.
Remedy Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
ERROR
Cause Turbidity measurement was not made for some reason.
Remedy Remove the cause.
                   ↓
Retry to measure the sample.
  5.4.4    Messages on the Abnormal Results List
If you obtain an abnormal result, see the printed abnormal results list (see pages 2-54 and 3-24) to 
determine the cause, and solve the problem by referencing the tables below. The abnormal results 
list includes only the errors that occurred after power-on. If an error persists, turn off the power and 
contact your distributor.
   Wear protective gloves to prevent exposure to pathogenic microbes before 
any operation that may expose you to samples.
   Discard used samples, test strips and protective gloves in accordance with 
local regulations for biohazardous waste.
Barcode misread
Description The barcode could not be read from the sample tube.
Cause 1. The sample tube is not labeled with a barcode, or the barcode is too dirty to read.
2. The barcode is labeled out of position.
3. The built-in barcode reader is out of order.
Remedy 1. Newly label the sample tube, and retry measurement.
2. Reattach the label in the correct position and retry measurement.
3. Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.
No sample
Description No sample was detected.
Cause The sample tube is empty.
Remedy Ensure the sample tube contains at least 2 mL of sample, and the sample level is 40 mm 
above the bottom of the tube.
                   ↓
Retry measurement.





AX-4030
5-21
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
Measurement error
Description A measurement error occurred.
Cause 1. Measurement was not made on this sample.
*  This error occurs when the instrument is configured to skip measurement when a barcode 
is misread.
2. Light intensity varied during measurement.
3. The reflectivity of a measurement items exceeded 120%.
4. The test strip is out of the correct position.
5. Sampling failed.
Remedy 1. See “Skipped” on page 5-17.
2. See 
“Reflection light intensity drift” on page 5-17.
3. See 
“Excess reflectivity” on page 5-18.
4. See 
“Test strip out-of-position” on page 5-18.
5. See 
“Abnormal sampling” on page 5-18.
Abnormal data
Description Abnormal colors were developed on one or more reagent pads on the test strip.
Cause Abnormal colored urine was measured, or the obtained result includes abnormal data.
Remedy Check the sample.
Positive sample
Description The obtained result includes positive values for one or more measurement items.
Cause The instrument measured a positive sample 
Remedy Check the sample.
S.G. measurement error
Description The instrument could not obtain a correct S.G. calibration result.
Cause 1. No S.G. measurement result is present.
2. The S.G. measurement result exceeds the specified range.
3. The S.G. cell is dirty.
4. Abnormally colored urine was measured.
Remedy 1 and 2. Perform S.G. calibration (see page 2-34).
3. Wash the S.G. cell (see page 4-24).
4. Check the sample.
Turbidity measurement error
Description The instrument could not obtain a correct turbidity measurement result.
Cause 1. No turbidity measurement result is present.
2. An abnormal turbidity measurement result was obtained.
Remedy 1 and 2. Turn off the power, and contact your distributor.





5-22
AX-4030
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
H
  5.5.1    If the Instrument Does Not Start Up (Replacing Fuses)
If the instrument does not start up after turning on both the main power switch (rear panel) and 
standby switch (front panel), it is possible that a fuse has blown. The instrument has a pair of fuses 
that can be accessed and replaced from the rear panel. Replace whichever is blown.
Prepare: Fuse (T5AE250V~) and flat-head screwdriver
   Use only fuses of the specified capacity. Over- or under-rated fuses can 
lead to equipment damage and fire. Make sure you have fuses of correct 
capacity before replacement.
NOTE: If the fuses blow soon after the replacement, there is something wrong with the 
instrument. In such case, contact your distributor.
  1    Turn off the power.
1 Press the standby switch to turn off the power.
• The green light turns off.
2 Turn off the main switch.
• Press the 
°
 side (“off” side) of the main power 
switch on the rear panel.
3 Unplug the power cord from its receptacle.
   Keep the power cord unplugged 
until otherwise instructed in this 
procedure.
If This Happens5.5

Standby
switch
ON
OFF
Main power
switch (rear) 





AX-4030
5-23
AUTION MAX  AX-4030  OPERATING MANUAL
  2    Remove the old fuse.
1 Put the tip of your finger under the tab at the bottom 
of the fuse holder, and pull the holder frontward.
2 Push the top of the fuse holder to rotate it frontward.
• This makes the fuses accessible.
3 Remove the blown fuse from the fuse holder.
  3    Insert a new fuse.
1 Insert a new fuse into the fuse holder, making sure 
it stands up straight.
2 Store the fuse holder as before.
• Lift the holder from the bottom, and rotate it 
backward until it clicks in place.
• Push the holder in until it stops.
  4    Turn on the power.
1 Plug in the power cord.
2 Press the main power switch.
• Press the I (“on”) side of the switch on the rear panel.
3 Press the standby switch to turn on the power.
• The standby switch will illuminate.

Fuse holder
Tab
2

3

2

Aution Max — автоматизация процесса биохимического анализа мочи

АUTION MAX полностью автоматизированный анализатор, который обрабатывает помещенные на борт образцы в непрерывном режиме. Благодаря использованию системы, перемещающей штатив для образцов, аппарат может анализировать от 50 до 100 образцов одновременно (в случае исследования Вами срочного образца мочи, доступна функция STAT).

Оптимальный диапазон окружающей температуры для тестовых полосок «AUTION STICKS» от 20 до 25°С. Однако, АUTION MAX имеет функцию температурной компенсации, которая позволит минимизировать, вызванные изменением температуры окружающей среды в диапазоне от 10 до 30°С.

АUTION MAX может сохранять в памяти результаты измерений 2700 образцов после классификации по типу измерения. Кроме того, анализатор может быть связан с внешними устройствами и также автоматически устанавливать идентификационные данные пациента путем считывания штрих-кода (дополнительная опция) размещенного на пробирке.

Основные технические характеристики:

• 225 тестов в час 
• первичная загрузка — 100 первичных пробирок с мочой
• встроенный фотометр – для определения цвета (23 оттенка) и степени мутности мочи
• 2-х волновой рефлексионный метод измерения (5 длин волн)
• объем образца 2.0 мл
• максимальная загрузка тест-полосок — 400  штук (2х200)

Автоматизация процесса измерения:

• автоматический забор мочи из первичных пробирок
• автоматическая детекция нетипичного окрашивания полосок (при наличии в моче интерферирующих веществ, лекарственных средств и пр.) — 23 цветовых оттенках
• автоматическая коррекция измеренных параметров по цвету мочи
• автоматическая коррекция относительной плотности мочи
• автоматическая коррекция результатов измерения глюкозы и белка в зависимости от концентрации в образце
• функция определения жидкости в пробирке
• анализ срочных образцов (STAT порт и STAT штатив)
• детализированная распечатка результатов
• функция определения мутности: Информация о мутности образца мочи может быть получена в 3 вариантах: «Прозрачный» («Clear»), «Непрозрачный» («Unclear») и «Мутный» («Very Unclear»)

Для работы на анализаторе используются 2 типа тест-полосок

• Aution Sticks 10EA  для автоматического измерения параметров мочи, 100 шт/уп —  ARKRAY Factory Inc., страна происхождения – Россия
• Aution Sticks 10PA для автоматического измерения параметров мочи, 100 шт/уп — ARKRAY Factory Inc., страна происхождения – Россия

Для внутрилабораторного контроля работы анализатора Aution Max AX-4030 используются следующие контрольные материалы

• AUTION CHECK I, контроль «Количественный анализа мочи», норма — ARKRAY Factory Inc., Япония
• AUTION CHECK II, контроль «Количественный анализа мочи», патология — ARKRAY Factory Inc., Япония

Рекомендуемый комплект поставки (стартовый набор)

Анализатор мочи Aution Max AX-4030 с принадлежностями — 1 шт. (арт. 14516Sc)

Тест-полоски Aution Sticks 10EA — 5 тубусов (расчитаны на 100 анализов) (арт. 100563)

Тест-полоски Aution Sticks 10PA  — 10 тубусов (расчитан на 100 анализов) (арт. 100564)

AUTION CHECK I, контроль «Количественный анализа мочи», норма — 1 упаковка (арт. 73554)

AUTION CHECK II, контроль «Количественный анализа мочи», патология — 1 упаковка (арт. 73555)

Концентрированный промывающий раствор — 1 л  (арт. 79053)

Термобумага — 5 рулонов входят в стартовый набор, поставляемый с прибором (арт. 5730)

Технические характеристики:

Параметры: глюкоза, белок, билирубин, уробилиноген, pH, кровь, кетоны, нитриты, лейкоциты, удельная плотность мочи.

Длины волн 430, 500, 565, 635, 760 нм

Принцип измерения Тест-полоска: рефракция

Моно и бихроматическое измерение

Удельный вес: проходящая рефрактометрия

Цвет: рефракция.

Моно и бихроматическое измерение

Мутность: метод светорассеивания

Тестовые полоски AUTION STICKS

Реакционное время на полоску 60 сек

Загружаемое колич. полосок 400 полосок (две емкости по 200 полосок)

Необходимый объем образца 2 мл

Контейнер для образца Пробирка

Максимальное загружаемое количество образцов 100 образцов

Емкость памяти для данных 2700 измерений (вкл. 200 контрольных измерений)

Дисплей Жидко-кристаллический дисплей, по 20 символов в каждом из 2-х рядов

Встроенный принтер 24-разрядный термопринтер (58 мм ширина)

Порты передачи данных Односторонний или двухсторонний

Окружающие условия для работы Температура: 10 — 30°С. Влажность: 30 — 60% относит. влажности (без конденсации влаги)

Питание Переменное напряжение 100/240 В, 50/60 Гц 250 вольт-ампер

Двухсторонний интерфейс по RS-232

Размеры, мм. 530 (ширина) х 530 (длина) х 530 (высота)

Вес 41 кг